HomeMy WebLinkAboutB08-0010 Project Manual Volume II (pgs 231-478)•
0 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221316
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING
1-3
0
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the
building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 30 -foot head of water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality - control inspection and test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF -dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; and
"NSF- drain" for plastic drain piping.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Hub - and - Spigot, Cast -Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
B. Hubless Cast -Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast -iron aerator and deaerator
drainage fittings.
2. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion- resistant
fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
220CT07
AEC - 27815
SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING
221316 -1
fr' 0
a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: CISPI310, with stainless -steel
corrugated shield; stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564,
rubber sleeve.
b. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: With stainless -steel shield, stainless -
steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following:
Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless -steel couplings; and
hubless - coupling joints.
D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following:
Service class, hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results
for Plumbing."
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary
sewers.
C. Install cast -iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration
through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation
watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
E. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches,
bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical
stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -turn, double Y- branch and
1/8 -bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.
Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more
than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are
connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
22OCT07 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316 -2
AEC - 27815
• i
G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and
alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install
required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and
other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller;
1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
Sleeves are not required for cast -iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs -on -grade if slab is
without membrane waterproofing.
J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
B. Cast -Iron, Soil- Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
101 1 1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General -duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
B. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve.
3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
4. Backwater valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Seismic - restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, damps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
220CT07 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316 -3
AEC - 27815
J
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel devis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G
H.
3.6
A.
B.
3.7
A.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods.
Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod.
4. Spacing for 10 -foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60
inches.
Install supports for vertical cast -iron soil piping every 15 feet.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
CONNECTIONS
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required
by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping
Specialties."
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and
union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2 -1/2 and
larger.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or dosing -in after
roughing -in and before setting fixtures.
P]
22OCT07 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316 -4
AEC - 27815
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make
required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221316
13
a
220CT07 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316 -5
AEC - 27815
D a
E
Pil
LJ
11
0 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221319
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Floor drains.
4. Roof flashing assemblies.
5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
6. Flashing materials.
7
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal, Cast -Iron Backwater Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
C. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME A112.14.1.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Body: Cast iron.
22OCT07 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 -1
AEC - 27815
7. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.
8. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless.
9. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to
hang closed.
10. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full -size, cast -iron, soil -pipe extension to field- installed
cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
B. Drain - Outlet Backwater Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
C. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
3. Size: Same as floor drain outlet.
4. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain.
5. Check Valve: Removable ball float.
6. Inlet: Threaded.
7. Outlet: Threaded or spigot.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Cast -Iron Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for cast iron for deanout test tee.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
6. Body Material: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, cast -iron plug.
8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than deanout size.
B. Cast -Iron Floor Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
22OCT07 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 -2
AEC - 27815
0 •
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Oatey.
C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME All 12.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.
5. Size: Same as connected branch.
6. Type: Adjustable housing.
7. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
8. Clamping Device: Required.
9. Outlet Connection: Spigot.
10. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
11. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
12. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel- bronze, copper alloy.
13. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
14. Top Loading Classification: Heavy] Duty.
15. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to deanout.
C. Cast -Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. M I FAB, Inc.
C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M. Include wall access.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
6. Body: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.
8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than deanout size.
9. Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome - plated bronze cover plate with screw.
10. Wall Access: Round, nickel - bronze, wall- installation frame and cover.
2.3 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast -Iron Floor Drains:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
22OCT07 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 -3
AEC - 27815
G� U
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Commercial Enameling Co.
b. Josam Company; Josam Div.
C. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Prier Products, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
I. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor /Stoneman Div.
b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch- thick, lead flashing collar
and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized -steel boot reinforcement and
counterFlashing fitting.
1. Open -Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal -proof vent cap.
3. Extended Vent Cap: With field - installed, vandal -proof vent cap.
2.5
I_�
a
FLASHING MATERIALS
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469 -inch thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.093 8-inch thickness.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloy.
E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, solvent -type, bituminous mastic.
IC
220CT07 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 -4
AEC - 27815
D
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint
construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate
flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve
ever for servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger
piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished
floor.
E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated,
with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with
grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4 -inch
total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
C. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1 -inch
total depression.
3. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.
C7
J. Install deep -seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
220CT07 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
AEC - 27815
221319 -5
K. Install floor - drain, trap -seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap -seal primer
connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap -seal primer connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
L. Install air -gap fittings on draining -type backflow preventers and on indirect -waste piping discharge
into sanitary drainage system.
M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
O. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
P. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep - pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker. Solder
joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and
roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt
or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty damping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing
fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into
cast -iron sleeve having calking recess.
22OCT07 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 -6
AEC - 27815
1,0 L
3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic - laminate equipment nameplate or sign
on or near each grease interceptor.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.
Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
3.5 PROTECTION
A.
B
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid dogging with dirt or debris and to
prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
n-
N
220CT07 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
AEC - 27815
221319 -7
PI
F.
• •
13
C7
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building.
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 30 -foot head of water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality- control inspection and test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SECTION 221413
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Hub - and - Spigot, Cast -Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
B. Hubless Cast -Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion -
resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: CISPI310, with stainless -steel
corrugated shield; stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564,
rubber sleeve.
220CT07
AEC - 27815
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
221413 -1
b. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: With stainless -steel shield,
stainless -steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 531A 53M, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40, galvanized. Include
ends matching joining method.
1. Drainage Fittings: ASME 816.12 threaded, cast -iron drainage pattern.
2. Pressure Fittings:
a. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106,
Schedule 40, galvanized, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining
method.
b. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME 816.39; Class 150; hexagonal -stock body with ball -
and- socket, metal - to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends.
C. Gray -Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
d. Cast -Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
e. Cast -Iron, Flanged Fittings: ASME 816.1, Class 125.
D. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,
solder joint fittings.
E. Solid -Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40, solid wall (underground only).
1. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns.
2. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:
a. Use ABS solvent cement that has a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, vent.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns.
2. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:
a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NIPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:
22OCT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -2
AEC - 27815
0 •
1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, and coupled joints.
40
3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.
C. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless -steel couplings; and
coupled joints.
3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.
4. [Solid -wall] [Cellular -core] ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints.
5. [Solid -wall] [Cellular -core] PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 33 Section
"Storm Utility Drainage Piping."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
C. Install Ceanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm
sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
D. Install cast -iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22
Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
E. Install wall- penetration -fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight.
F. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
G. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep
bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard
increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage
piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
H. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades
and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint
as completed.
Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Storm- Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
J. Sleeves are not required for cast -iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs -on -grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.
22OCT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -3
AEC - 27815
K. Install ABS storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2661.
L. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
M. Install underground ABS and PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
B. Hub - and - Spigot, Cast -Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Hubless Cast -Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless- coupling joints.
D. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water - flushable, lead -free flux; ASTM B 32, lead- free -alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
E. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
3. Backwater valve are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Seismic - restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1E
P]
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, damps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
3.
E
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel Bevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
220CT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -4
AEC - 27815
® •
C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 -1 /2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod.
4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4 -inch rod.
5. Spacing for 10 -foot lengths maybe increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to
60 inches.
G. Install supports for vertical cast -iron soil piping every 15 feet.
H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 1 -1/4: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 1 -1/2: 108 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8 -inch rod.
4. NPS 2 -1/2: 11 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (: 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8 -inch rod.
7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4 -inch rod.
I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 -1/4: 72 inches with 318 -inch rod.
2. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
3. NPS 2 -1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8 -inch rod.
K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
L. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod.
4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4 -inch rod.
M. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches.
N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
22OCT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -5
AEC - 27815
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or dosing -in
after roughing -in.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid dogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221413
P]
1E
P]
220CT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -6
AEC - 27815
•
0 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221423
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
n*
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties:
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Roof drains.
4. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal, Cast -Iron Backwater Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
C. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME A112.14.1.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Body: Cast iron.
22OCT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
AEC - 27815
221423 -1
I Q 0
7. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.
8. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless.
9. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field
modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition.
10. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full -size, cast -iron, soil -pipe extension to field -
installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
B. Drain -Outlet Backwater Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
C. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
3. Size: Same as floor drain outlet.
4. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain.
5. Check Valve: Removable ball float.
6. Inlet: Threaded.
7. Outlet: Threaded or spigot.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Cast -Iron Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for cast iron for deanout test tee.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
6. Body Material: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.
8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than deanout size.
IE
220CT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -2
AEC - 27815
® 0
B. Cast -Iron Floor Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Oatey.
C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.
5. Size: Same as connected branch.
6. Type: Adjustable housing.
7. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
8. Clamping Device: Not required.
9. Outlet Connection: Threaded
10. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
11. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set - screws.
12. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel- bronze, copper alloy.
13. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
14. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
15. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
C. Cast -Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation
4. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M. Include wall access.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
6. Body: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, drilled- and - threaded brass plug.
8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
9. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome - plated brass or stainless -steel cover plate with screw.
220CT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -3
AEC - 27815
G O
10. Wall Access: Round, nickel - bronze, copper -alloy wall- installation frame and cover.
2.3 ROOF DRAINS
A. Cast -Iron Roof Drains:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Marathon Roofing Products.
C. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Portals Plus, Inc.
e. Prier Products, Inc.
f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
4. Standard: ASME All 12.21.2M.
5. Pattern: Balcony & Roof drain.
6. Body Material: Cast iron.
7. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
8. Flow - Control Weirs: Not required.
9. Outlet: Bottom.
10. Dome Material: Cast iron.
11. Extension Collars: Required.
12. Underdeck Clamp: Required.
13. Sump Receiver: Not required
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Downspout Boots:
1. Description: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil pipe.
2. Size: Same as or larger than connected downspout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials,
joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated: V)
22OCT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -4
AEC - 27815
0
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
B.
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger deanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install deanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Roof materials are specified in Division 07.
1. Install roof -drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain
and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
Install cast -iron soil pipe downspout boots at grade with top of hub 6 inches above grade.
Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep - pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
CONNECTIONS
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
FLASHING INSTALLATION
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around
sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
22OCT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -5
AEC - 27815
L
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty damping ring or device.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid dogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221423
P]
22OCT07 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -6
AEC - 27815
• •
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221429
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sump pumps and accessories, inside the building, for building storm drainage
systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sump pump specified. Include certified performance curves
with operating points plotted on curves, and rated capacities of selected models, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SUMP PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. ABS Pumps, Inc.
2. Federal Pump Corp.
22OCT07 SUMP PUMPS 221429 -1
AEC - 27815
3. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries.
4. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
5. Little Giant Pump Co.
6. Metropolitan Industries, Inc.
7. Weil Pump Company, Inc.
8. Zoeller Company.
B. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, simplex, single - stage, centrifugal, end - suction,
submersible, direct - connected sump pumps complying with UL 778 and HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3 for
submersible sump pumps.
C. Casing: Cast iron; with cast -iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller,
and vertical discharge with companion flange for piping connection.
D. Impeller: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically balanced,
semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed and secured to shaft.
E. Casing and Impeller: Cast iron casing with metal inlet strainer and brass, bronze, or cast -iron
impeller.
F. Casing and Impeller: Cast iron or plastic casing with inlet strainer and metal or plastic impeller.
G. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory- sealed, grease - lubricated ball bearings.
H. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor -start type, with built -in overload protection; three - conductor
waterproof power cable of length required, and with grounding plug and cable- sealing assembly for
connection at pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment"
I. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized -
steel pipe.
J. Pit Cover: Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating and strong enough to support controls. See
Part 2 "Sump Pump Pits" Article for other requirements.
K. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal- mounted float switch; with float, float rod, and rod
buttons.
L. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal- mounted float switch; with float, float rod, and rod
buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and
to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.
M. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 6, 120 -V ac, float switch, mounted on discharge piping.
2.3 SUMP PUMP PITS
A. Description: Concrete pit with sump, pipe connections, curb frame, and separate cover.
B. Sump: Construct of watertight, cast -in -place, reinforced concrete with sidewall openings for pipe
connections. Cast -in -place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in Division 03
Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
1. Pipe Connections: Sleeved openings large enough for mechanical sleeve seals for drainage
piping. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
22OCT07 SUMP PUMPS 221429 -2
AEC - 27815
0 0
n�ll
Work Results for Plumbing," and drainage piping is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility
Storm Drainage Piping."
C. Curb Frame and Cover:
1. Curb Frame Material: Galvanized steel or steel with bituminous coating.
a. Pattern: Angle- cross - section shape with flat top surface.
2. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access to pumps,
pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
a. Material: Cast iron.
b. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for pits installed in
foot - traffic areas.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
Anamet, Inc.
2.
Flex -Hose Co., Inc.
3.
Flex -Weld, Inc.
4.
Mercer Rubber.
5.
Metraflex, Inc.
6.
Unaflex Inc.
741
B. Description: 125 -psig minimum working- pressure rating and ends matching pump connection:
1. Bronze Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid.
Include copper -tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to tubing.
2. Stainless -Steel Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless -steel inner tubing covered with
stainless -steel wire braid. Include stainless -steel nipples or flanges, welded to tubing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 22
Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy - coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
a
B. Cast -in -place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 03.
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
SUMP PUMPS
004TH,.'
0
3.2 SUMP PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
B. Install sump pumps according to applicable requirements in HI 1.4.
C. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
D. Set submersible sump pumps on pit floor. Make direct connections to storm drainage piping.
E. Construct sump pump pits and connect to drainage piping. Set pit curb frame recessed in and
anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with
finished floor.
F. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
G. Install piping adjacent to sump pumps to allow service and maintenance.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
END OF SECTION 221429
R]
R1
220CT07 SUMP PUMPS 221429 -4
AEC - 27815
• 0
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221400
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS HOT WATER GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Iiai TIT -lun
A. This Section includes the following hot water generator:
1. Commercial side arm water heater and storage.
2. Water heater accessories and mixing valve.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
D. Warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 -2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-
2004.
C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME -code construction is indicated, fabricate and label
commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1.
D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through
9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
`1E 11111111111111111IM10=Z_ 2 1 MA
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of fuel -fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
G
b. Faulty operation of controls.
22OCT07 HOT WATER GENERATORS 223400 -1
AEC - 27815
C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
a. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 COMMERCIAL, HOT WATER GENERATOR
A. Commercial, hot water generator: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3 /CSA 4.3.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Triangle Tube
b. Lochinvar
2. Storage -Tank Construction: ASME code steel with 150 -psig working - pressure rating.
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to
tank before testing.
1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME 81.20.1.
2) NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel
and stainless -steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and
copper -alloy flanges.
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank
linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
3. Factory- Installed, Storage -Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold -water inlet is near bottom of tank.
C. Drain Valve: Corrosion - resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank
except connections and controls.
e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f. Temperature Control: Adjustable aquastat.
g. Safety Controls: Automatic, high - temperature -limit and low -water cutoff devices or
systems.
1E
!7
F.
22OCT07 HOT WATER GENERATORS 223400 -2
AEC - 27815
• •
h. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as
heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working- pressure
rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Honeywell Sparo mixing valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
j C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
? relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial, water- heater,
relief -valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
D. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for hose -end drain valves.
E. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and
Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
F. Install piping -type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting -type heat traps.
G. Fill water heaters with water.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
i
22OCT07 HOT WATER GENERATORS 223400 -3
AEC - 27815
C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect installation, including
connections.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as
specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 223400
22OCT07 HOT WATER GENERATORS 223400 -4
AEC - 27815
•
r1114
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
/A
This Section includes the following:
•
SECTION 230500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. HVAC demolition.
8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
9. Concrete bases.
10. Supports and anchorages.
1.2
A.
�1
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
1.4
11
I1]4d1kil1119
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples
include installations within unheated shelters.
SUBMITTALS
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code — Steel."
220CT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -1
AEC - 27815
J
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may
be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical
services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or
efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
Pipe Threads: ASME 61.20.1 for factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: ASME 816.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum
thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
Plastic, Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint,
plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated, union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at
180 deg F.
E
F]
E
22OCT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -2
AEC - 27815
• •
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig minimum
working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
pipe and sleeve.
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM and NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Plastic, Carbon steel], and Stainless steel]. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion - resistant coating and stainless steel of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and
integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast -iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth -outer surface with nailing flange for
attaching to wooden forms.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit
around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One - Piece, Deep- Pattern Type: Deep - drawn, box - shaped brass with polished chrome - plated finish.
0 1
C. One - Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw.
220CT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -3
AEC - 27815
A
1. Finish: Polished chrome - plated.
D. Split- Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome - plated.
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post - hardening, volume - adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,
and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
22OCT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -4
AEC - 27815
0 •
N. Aboveground, Exterior- -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular dear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
O. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular dear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
P. Fire - Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in
requirements.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free
solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,
using copper- phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and dean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading
is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
C7
22OCT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -5
AEC - 27815
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding
operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent- Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe- handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/13 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other - than - schedule- number PVC pipe and socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat - Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations.
Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
220CT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -6
AEC - 27815
0 0
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written
instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy - coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base,
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000 -psi 28-day compressive - strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC
materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.8 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base
plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
22OCT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -7
AEC - 27815
J
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 230500
P]
220CT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -8
AEC - 27815
0
U
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230513
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS COMMON MOTOR WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single -phase and polyphase, general - purpose, horizontal,
small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and
installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for
field installation.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
0 1 1) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC
equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 70 deg f and at altitude of 8,150 feet above sea
level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
22OCT07 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -1
AEC - 27815
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random - wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F.
1. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame
sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced - Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited
to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated
with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture - resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by 1j
pulse -width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium - Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter -Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
5. All Three phase motors shall be provided with phase loss protection.
2.5 SINGLE -PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of
specific motor application:
1. Permanent -split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable- torque, permanent - split- capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.
Thermal- protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
22OCT07 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -2
AEC - 27815
0
rl*3
D
13
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 230513
220CT07 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -3
AEC - 27815
E
PI
PE
s
I I ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230516
10 LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal - bellows expansion joints.
2. Expansion compensators.
3. Packed slip expansion joints.
4. Pipe bends and loops.
5. Alignment guides and anchors.
!7
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Delegated- Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for
selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly and attachment to building structure.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end
connections, and location for each expansion joint.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Product certificates.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
11
22OCT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
AEC - 27815
230516 -1
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal - Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular- corrugated - bellows type with external tie
rods.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product name,
designation, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Flex -Hose Co., Inc.
C. Flexicraft Industries.
d. Flex - Pression, Ltd.
e. Flex -Weld, Inc.
f. Metraflex, Inc.
g. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
h. Proco Products, Inc.
3. Metal - Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single or Multiple -ply phosphor- bronze
bellows, copper pipe end connections, and brass shrouds.
4. Metal - Bellows Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single, or multiple -ply stainless -steel
bellows, steel pipe end connections, and carbon -steel shroud.
5. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Configuration: Single, or double bellows type with base, unless otherwise indicated.
7. End Connections: Flanged or welded.
B. Expansion Compensators: Double -ply corrugated steel, stainless - steel, or copper -alloy bellows in a
housing with internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end dip for positioning.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product name or
designation or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Flexicraft Industries.
C. Flex - Pression, Ltd.
d. Flex -Weld, Inc.
e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
f. Metraflex, Inc.
g. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division.
h. Unaflex Inc.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Configuration for Copper Piping: Two -ply phosphor- bronze or stainless -steel bellows and
bronze or stainless -steel shroud.
5. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two -ply stainless -steel bellows and carbon -steel shroud.
6. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint.
7. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
8. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded.
P1
220CT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 -2
AEC - 27815
D
C. Packed Slip Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1007, carbon- steel, packing type designed for repacking
under pressure and pressure rated for 250 psig at 400 deg F minimum. Include asbestos -free PTFE
packing, compound limit stops, and drip connection if used for steam piping.
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
C. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc - coated carbon steel.
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc - coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc- coated steel.
E. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Comply with requirements in Division 03
Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
220CT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 -3
AEC - 27815
2.2
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings, or comparable product by one of the following:
3. Configuration: Single- and doublejoint class with base, unless otherwise indicated.
4. End Connections: Flanged or weld ends to match piping system.
ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two- section outer cylinder and base for alignment
of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
C. Flex -Hose Co., Inc.
d. Flexicraft Industries.
e. Flex -Weld, Inc.
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g. Metraflex, Inc.
h. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
L Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division.
2.3
A.
MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS
Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME 1318.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert- wedge -type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and - packaged, dry, hydraulic- cement, nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION -JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non -
Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."
B. Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed.
C. Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end - loading and torsional stress.
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold- sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb
tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME 831.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 SWING CONNECTIONS
A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main.
3.4 ALIGNMENT -GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.5 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME 831.9 and
to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of poured -in -place concrete of dimensions indicated and include
embedded fasteners.
22OCT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 -4
AEC - 27815
• •
7*3
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion joint manufacturer's written instructions if expansion
joints or compensators are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in
concrete.
END OF SECTION 230516
7
220CT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
AEC - 27815
230516 -5
V
M
Wj
6b]
E
C
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230519
0
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Flowmeters.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL -CASE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.
Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
B.
Case: Die -cast aluminum, brass or Chrome - plated brass 7 inches or 9 inches] long.
C.
Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic - liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
D.
Tube Background: Satin - faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
E.
Window: Glass or plastic.
F.
Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device, rigid, straight or angle type, type].
G.
Stem: Copper - plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
J
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -1
AEC - 27815
2.2 DUCT -TYPE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product
by one of the following:
1. Miljoco Corp.
2. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Case: Die -cast aluminum, metal or plastic, 7 inches long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
E. Window: Glass or plastic.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device, rigid or angle type.
G. Stem: Metal, for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installation.
H. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermometer stem.
I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.3 BIMETALLIC- ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS IV>
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
2. Ernst Gage Co.
3. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.
4. Tel -Tru Manufacturing Company.
5. Trerice, H. O. Co.
6. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Description: Direct - mounting, bimetallic - actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME 840.3.
C. Case: Dry or Liquid - filled type, stainless steel with 3 -inch to 5 -inch diameter.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Dial: Satin faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
F. Pointer: Red or other dark -color metal.
G. Window: Glass or plastic.
H. Ring: Stainless steel.
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -2
AEC - 27815
•
I. Connector: Adjustable angle, rigid, back or bottom type.
J. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
K. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
F �9OnI :I V ►y,[91TA:I >
A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
B. Description: Pressure - tight, socket -type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.5 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
2. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Direct- Mounting, Dial -Type Pressure Gages: Indicating -dial type complying with ASME 840.100.
? 1.
Case: Dry or Liquid - filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, metal or plastic, 4- 1 /24nch to 6-
inch diameter.
2.
Pressure - Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom -outlet type unless back - outlet type is indicated.
4.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5.
Dial: Satin faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6.
Pointer: Red or other dark - color, metal.
7.
Window: Glass or plastic.
8.
Ring: Brass, Stainless steel or plastic.
9.
Accuracy: Grade A, (plus or minus 1 percent of middle half) or B (plus or minus 2 percent of
middle half) scale.
10.
Vacuum - Pressure Range: 30 -in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
11.
Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
C. Pressure -Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless -steel needle type.
2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion- resistant, porous -metal disc of
material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.6 VENTURI FLOWMETERS
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
220CT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -3
AEC - 27815
V
2. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div.
3. Bailey- Fischer & Porter Co.
4. Flow Design, Inc.
5. Victaulic Co. of America. It)
B. Description: Differential- pressure design for installation in piping; with calibrated flow - measuring
element, separate flowmeter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and conversion chart compatible with
flow-measuring element, flowmeter, and system fluid.
C. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and attached tag with flow
conversion data.
D. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
E. Temperature Rating: 250 deg F.
F. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
G. End Connections for NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged or welded.
H. Range: Flow range of flow- measuring element and flowmeter shall cover operating range of
equipment or system served.
I. Permanent Indicators: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for connected flowmeter
element, and having 6 -inch- diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for
connecting to flowmeter element.
1. Scale: Gallons per minute.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of range.
J. Portable Indicators: Differential- pressure type calibrated for connected flowmeter element and
having two 12 -foot hoses in carrying case.
1. Scale: Gallons per minute.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of range.
K. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid -in -glass thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.
2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
3. Outside -air, return -air, and mixed -air ducts.
B. Install bimetallic - actuated dial thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.
2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
3. Outside -air, return -air, and mixed -air ducts.
C. Install dry or liquid -filled -case -type, bimetallic- actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of
each pump.
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -4
AEC - 27815
D. Install direct- mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
f readable position.
E. Install needle -valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).
F. Install needle -valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.
G. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and
flowmeters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.
I. Install differential- pressure -type flowmeter elements with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe
upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.
K. Install flowmeters at discharge of hydronic system pumps and at inlet of hydronic air coils.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for
meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
B. Connect flowmeter- system elements to meters.
it i
220CT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -5
AEC - 27815
• •
D.
Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Heating Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2- degree scale divisions
2. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2- degree scale divisions
3. Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F, with 2- degree scale divisions
3.2
GAGE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install dry-case -type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure - reducing valve.
B.
Install dry or liquid - filled -case -type pressure gages at chilled- and condenser -water inlets and outlets
of chillers.
C.
Install dry or liquid - filled- case -type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.3
INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install direct- mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B.
Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees
where thermometers are indicated.
C.
Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are indicated.
Attach to duct with screws.
D. Install direct- mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
f readable position.
E. Install needle -valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).
F. Install needle -valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.
G. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and
flowmeters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.
I. Install differential- pressure -type flowmeter elements with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe
upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.
K. Install flowmeters at discharge of hydronic system pumps and at inlet of hydronic air coils.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for
meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
B. Connect flowmeter- system elements to meters.
it i
220CT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -5
AEC - 27815
G O
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION 230519
F7
P]
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -6
AEC - 27815
11
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230523
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general -duty valves:
1. Copper -alloy ball valves.
2. Ferrous -alloy butterfly valves.
3. Bronze check valves.
4. Gray -iron swing check valves.
5. Spring - loaded, lift -disc check valves.
6. Bronze gate valves.
7. Cast -iron gate valves.
8. Bronze globe valves.
r3
A
B. See Division 21 fire- suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire- protection valves.
C. See Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control valves and actuators.
D. See Division 23 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and
required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities;
furnished specialties; and accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: ASME 831.9 for building services piping valves.
B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design
criteria.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
220CT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
AEC - 27815
230523 -1
2.2 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ferrous Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -turn types.
2. Lever Handle: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast -iron valves, ASME 816.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24
for bronze valves.
I. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME 816.18.
1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe
valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
J. Threaded: With threads according to ASME 61.20.1.
K. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.3 COPPER -ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. One - Piece, Full Port Copper -Alloy Ball Valves:
a.
American Valve, Inc.
b.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
C.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d.
DynaQuip Controls.
e.
Grinnell Corporation.
f.
Jamesbury, Inc.
g.
Kitz Corporation of America.
h.
Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
i.
NIBCO INC.
j.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Safety - Exhaust, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b.
DynaQuip Controls.
C.
Grinnell Corporation.
d.
Hammond Valve.
22OCT07
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
AEC - 27815
230523 -2
K
Fj
0 •
e. Jamesbury, Inc.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
B. Full Port Copper -Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SPA 10.
C. One - Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome - plated bronze ball, PTFE
or TFE seats, and 400 -psig minimum CWP rating.
D. Safety - Exhaust, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Two -piece bronze body with exhaust vent opening,
chrome - plated ball with vent, blowout -proof stem, locking handle, and working pressure rating of
400 -psig CWP.
2.4 FERROUS -ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flangeless, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
C.
Grinnell Corporation.
d.
Hammond Valve.
e.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
f.
Mueller Steam Specialty.
g.
NIBCO INC.
h.
i.
Red White Valve Corp.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Single- Flange, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. Mueller Steam Specialty.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red -White Valve Corp.
i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP -67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining
suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flangeless, 150 -psig CWP Rating, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two -piece
stem.
2.5 BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
220CT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -3
AEC - 27815
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Walworth Co.
2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Kitz Corporation of America.
C. Milwaukee Valve Company.
3. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red -White Valve Corp.
i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP -80.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
bronze seat.
D. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
bronze seat.
E. Type 4, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze
seat.
2.6 GRAY -IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
3. Mueller Co.
4. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Gray -Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP -71.
C. Type II, Class 125, gray -iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.
D. Type Il, Class 250, gray -iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.
2.7 SPRING - LOADED, LIFT -DISC CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type I, Wafer Lift -Disc Check Valves:
a. Mueller Steam Specialty.
220CT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
AEC - 27815
230523 -4
P]
•
2. Type II, Compact Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
C. Hammond Valve.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. Mueller Steam Specialty.
f. NIBCO INC.
3. Type III, Globe Lift -Disc Check Valves:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Hammond Valve.
C. Metraflex Co.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. NIBCO INC.
4. Type IV, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Check -All Valve Mfg. Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
C. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. Mueller Steam Specialty.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Wafts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
0
B. Lift -Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring - loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or
1 alloy seat.
C. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift -Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast -iron shell with diameter
matching companion flanges.
D. Type II, Class 125, Compact - Wafer, Lift -Disc Check Valves: Compact -wafer style with cast -iron shell
with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.
E. Type III, Class 125, Globe Lift -Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast -iron shell and flanged ends.
F. Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift -Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and
threaded ends.
2.8 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 2, Bronze, Rising -Stem, Solid -Wedge Gate Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Cincinnati Valve Co.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
22OCT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -5
AEC - 27815
c
L Red -White Valve Corp.
j. Walworth Co.
2. Type 3, Bronze, Rising -Stem, Split-Wedge Gate Valves:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
C. Grinnell Corporation.
d. NIBCO INC.
B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP -80, with ferrous -alloy handwheel.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge and
union -ring bonnet.
D. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge[ and
union -ring bonnet].
E. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge and
union -ring bonnet.
2.9 CAST -IRON GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type I, Cast -Iron, Nonrising -Stem Gate Valves:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Red -White Valve Corp.
h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Type I, Cast -Iron, Rising -Stem Gate Valves:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Red -White Valve Corp.
h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Cast -Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP -70, Type I.
C. Class 125, NRS, Bronze - Mounted, Cast -Iron Gate Valves: Cast -iron body with bronze trim,
nonrising stem, and solid -wedge disc.
D. Class 125, OS&Y, Bronze - Mounted, Cast -Iron Gate Valves: Cast -iron body with bronze trim, rising
stem, and solid -wedge disc.
220CT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -6
AEC - 27815
2.10 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Red -White Valve Corp.
j. Walworth Co.
B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP -80, with ferrous -alloy handwheel.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic PTFE or TFE disc and
union -ring bonnet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS
} A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use
the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves.
2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Spring - loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with
higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Chilled -Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1.
Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One, or Two 150 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2.
Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 150 ferrous alloy.
3.
Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single -flange 150 -psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with
EPDM liner.
4.
Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150 horizontal or vertical, bronze.
5.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
6.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron.
7.
Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single or Dual- plate, wafer, wafer -lug, or double -
flanged, Class 125 or 150 ferrous alloy.
8.
Spring - Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150.
9.
Spring - Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, II or 111, Class 125,
cast iron.
10.
Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2 or 3, Class 150, bronze.
11.
Gate Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type 1, Class 250, NRS, OS&Y, bronze - mounted cast
iron.
12.
Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
220CT07
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -7
AEC - 27815
13. Globe Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze - mounted cast iron.
D. Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One, or Two 150 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 150 ferrous alloy.
3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single -flange 150 -psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with
EPDM liner.
4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150 horizontal or vertical, bronze.
5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron.
7. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single or Dual- plate, wafer, wafer -lug, or double -
flanged, Class 125 or 150 ferrous alloy.
8. Spring - Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150.
9. Spring- Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type 1, II or III, Class 125,
cast iron.
10. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2 or 3, Class 150, bronze.
11. Gate Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, NRS, OS &Y, bronze - mounted cast
iron.
12. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
13. Globe Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze - mounted cast iron.
E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded ends, except provide valves
with threaded ends for heating hot water, steam, and steam condensate services.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual -Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
E
P]
22OCT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -8
AEC - 27815
0
•
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping joint construction.
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water- flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead- free -alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION 230523
C7
13
220CT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -9
AEC - 27815
rA -- m
LM
E
E
E
C�
C�
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230529
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
Pius
C7
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal- hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Equipment supports.
B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural -steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
C. See Division 21 Section "Water -Based Fire - Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire -
protection piping.
D. See Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and
anchors.
E. See Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for
vibration isolation devices.
F. See Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems,
system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Design seismic - restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from
authorities having jurisdiction.
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AEC - 27815
230529 -1
LM
n
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Thermal- hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder- actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory- fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers:
1.
AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2.
Bergen -Power Pipe Supports.
3.
B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
5.
Empire Industries, Inc.
6.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
7.
Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
8.
Grinnell Corp.
9.
GS Metals Corp.
10.
National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
11.
PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
12.
PHS Industries, Inc.
13.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
22OCT07
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -2
AEC - 27815
0
D
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
•
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field fabricated pipe - support assembly made from
structural -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- bolts.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA -3, shop- or field fabricated pipe- support assembly made of steel channels and
other components.
B. Manufacturers:
1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO /Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power -Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
1 C.
D.
2.5
A.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
THERMAL - HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
Description: 100 -psig- minimum, compressive- strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal
shield.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO /Michigan Hanger Co.
3. PHS Industries, Inc.
4. Pipe Shields, Inc.
5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C. Insulation -Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation -Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
0 1
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -3
AEC - 27815
1�9
L
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder - Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials
where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
C. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
B. Mechanical- Expansion Anchors: Insert- wedge -type zinc - coated or stainless steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Industries, Inc.
C. Hilt, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field - fabricated equipment support made from structural -steel shapes.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and - packaged, dry, hydraulic- cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28-day compressive strength.
P1
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -4
AEC - 27815
0 1 )
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not
have field - applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct
contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to
NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy - Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5. U -Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast -iron floor flange.
7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not
necessary.
G. Vertical- Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser damps.
H. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
E1*1
220CT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AEC - 27815
230529 -5
Ln
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe
hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top -Beam C- Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C- Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
8. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe - Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation
that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal- Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1 -1/4
inches.
2. Spring- Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.
3. Variable - Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
L. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA -102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder- actuated fasteners or mechanical- expansion anchors instead of building attachments
where required in concrete construction.
P]
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -6
AEC - 27815
• 0
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports,
damps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for grouping
of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field- assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal- Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder- actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder - actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder- actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical- expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers'and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded - structural -steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME 831.9 (for building services piping)
are not exceeded.
M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach damps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -7
AEC - 27815
On
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal- hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME 831.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated.
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall
span an arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-112: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal- Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
E
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -8
AEC - 27815
•
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field- painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 230529
a
220CT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AEC - 27815
230529 -9
PI
K
•
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230548
0
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Housed spring mounts.
4. Elastomeric hangers.
5. Spring hangers.
6. Spring hangers with vertical -limit stops.
7. Pipe riser resilient supports.
8. Resilient pipe guides.
9. Restraining braces and cables.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
! A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2. Amber /Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
C. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area,
molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
Resilient Material: Oil- and water- resistant neoprene, rubber and /or hermetically sealed
compressed fiberglass.
D. Mounts: Double- deflection type, with molded, oil- resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed
fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory- drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to
equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate
capacity range.
220CT07 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING 230548 -1
AEC - 27815
1. Materials: Cast - ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,
oil- resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and
attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock - absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge -
bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
E. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.
1. Materials: Cast - ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,
oil- resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and
attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock- absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge -
bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
F. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open- spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4 -inch- thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to
fasten and level equipment.
G. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open- spring isolators with seismic or limit -stop
restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight
being removed; factory- drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4 -inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator
pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt
that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
H. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1. Housing: Ductile -iron or steel housing to provide all - directional seismic restraint.
2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4 -inch travel up or down before
contacting a resilient collar.
I. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double- deflection type, fitted with molded, oil- resistant elastomeric
isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color -code
or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
22OCT07 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING 230548 -2
AEC - 27815
J. Spring Hangers: Combination coil- spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in
compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum
of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel- washer - reinforced cup
to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self- centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring
coil.
K. Spring Hangers with Vertical -Limit Stop: Combination coil- spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with
spring and insert in compression and with a vertical -limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum
of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
i or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil - resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up -stop" on lower threaded
rod.
8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring
coil.
Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical -limit stops
arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the
isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
M. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a
factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and
contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of
pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an
evaluation service member of ICC -ES, OSHPD and /or an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
22OCT07 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING 230548 -3
AEC - 27815
O �
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to
receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic - Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to cant' present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits.
3.2 VIBRATION- CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section 'Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs,
equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B. Equipment Restraints:
Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between
anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
C. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SPA 27.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80
feet o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
E. Install seismic- restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-
ES, OSHPD and /or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required
submittals for component.
F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor - mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient
media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
H. Drilled -in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered
during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications
conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy -duty sleeve
anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor
is to be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc - coated steel anchors for interior and stainless -steel anchors for exterior
applications.
END OF SECTION 230548
220CT07 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING 230548 -4
AEC - 27815
0
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230553
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT
PARTR 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, (0.032 -inch) Stainless steel, (0.025 -inch) Aluminum, (0.032 -
inch) or anodized aluminum, (0.032 -inch) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2
by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three - fourths the size of principal
lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self - tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow.
3. Background Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow to contrast against letter color.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2
by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the size of principal
lettering.
22OCT07 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 230553 -1
AEC - 27815
� (7
7. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self- tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch bond
paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is
indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where
equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 thick,
and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow.
Background Color Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow to contrast against letter color.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2 by 3/4
inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch
for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless -steel [rivets] [rivets or self - tapping screws] [self- tapping screws].
H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color- coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to [partially cover] [cover full]
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self- Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent- adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1 -1/2 inches high.
j
22OCT07 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 230553 -2
AEC - 27815
2.4 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color. Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow.
C. Background Color: Background Color Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow to contrast against
letter color.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2 by 3/4
inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch
for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self- tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations
as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1 -1/2 inches high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices,
including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color- Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting and
High - Performance Coatings."
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed
locations as follows:
220CT07 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 230553 -3
AEC - 27815
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where
flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas
of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Chilled -Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow..
b. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow to contrast against letter color.
2. Heating Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow..
b. Letter Color: Black, Blue, Red, White, and /or Yellow to contrast against letter color.
3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic - laminated or self- adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the
following color codes:
1. Blue: For cold -air supply ducts.
2. Yellow. For hot -air supply ducts.
3. Green: For exhaust -, outside -, relief -, return -, and mixed -air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50
feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
END OF SECTION 230553
E
220CT07 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 230553 -4
AEC - 27815
•
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230593
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant - volume air systems.
2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Constant -flow hydronic systems.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step -by -step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
B. Certified TAB reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by NEBB or TABB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB or TABB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by NEBB or TABB as a
TAB technician.
220CT07 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
AEC - 27815
230593 -1
O 0
B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by consulting engineer.
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5,
"Instrumentation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that
locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for
environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions
about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a
system.
2. Calculate system -effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance.
To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans
and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the
design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality - control testing, cleaning, and
adjusting specked in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and
tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
Examine terminal units, such as heat pumps, and verify that they are accessible and their controls
are connected and functioning.
P]
220CT07 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -2
AEC - 27815
9 •
7111
J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
K. Examine three -way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid
flows.
L. Examine heat - transfer coils for correct piping connections and for dean and straight fins.
M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and
record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures.
B. Complete system - readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical -power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, dean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature - control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and access
to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems ",
SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.
Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 -2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as
used to construct ducts.
2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings,
vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper - control positions, valve position indicators,
fan - speed - control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material to show final settings.
0 D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units.
220CT07 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC
AEC - 27815
230593 -3
G
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" duct layouts.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct - airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air
dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air - handling -unit components.
K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT - VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan
manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements,
measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that
houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air - handling unit, rooftop
unit, and other air - handling and - treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat -
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
220CT07 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -4
AEC - 27815
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual
static pressures. Calculate actual system -effect factors. Recommend adjustments to
accommodate actual conditions.
6. Obtain approval from Consulting Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air - handling units for
adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air - handling -unit performance.
7. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full- cooling, full -
heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake
horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows
within specified tolerances.
Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the
total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume
dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust
submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
} 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct- reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the
dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specked tolerances of indicated quantities
without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of
system. Check the sum of branch - circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.
3. Check makeup water- station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow - control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
220CT07 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -5
AEC - 27815
5. Set differential - pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully
closed position when pump is positive - displacement type unless several terminal valves are
kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow - balancing device so motor
nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive - displacement
pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure
differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage
heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump
has the intended impeller size.
a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from
Consulting Engineer and comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic
Pumps."
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump
and mark pump manufacturer's head - capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until
indicated water flow is achieved.
a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload
conditions.
3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
C. Measure flow at all pressure- independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open
position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow - pressure -drop
relationship may be used as a flow - indicating device.
F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.
220CT07 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -6
AEC - 27815
0 •
H.
I.
J.
3.8
A.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature.
Measure the differential- pressure - control -valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal- protection - element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable- Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from
minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record
observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and
nameplate data.
3.9
A.
B.
C.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
Verify proper rotation of fans.
Measure entering- and leaving -air temperatures.
Record compressor data.
PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS
Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving -water temperatures and water flow.
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT - TRANSFER COILS
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
220CT07 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -7
AEC - 27815
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
llI�Cc3
A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in
"Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices.
Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance
measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general
construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in
progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems
being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for
systems serving multiple floors.
3.14 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for
tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
220CT07 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -8
AEC - 27815
•
•
4.
Project location.
5.
Architect's name and address.
6.
Engineer's name and address.
7.
Contractor's name and address.
8.
Report date.
9.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11.
Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor -, return -, and exhaust -air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable- air -volume systems.
g. Settings for supply -air, static - pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each
system with single -line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are
being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
0
220CT07 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -9
AEC - 27815
K
0
0
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230700
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, ductwork, equipment, and pipe,
including the following:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass.
b. Flexible elastomeric.
C. Mineral fiber.
d. Polystyrene.
rl
2. Fire -rated insulation systems.
3. Insulating cements.
4. Adhesives.
5. Mastics.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory- applied jackets.
8. Field - applied fabric - reinforcing mesh.
9. Field- applied jackets.
10. Tapes.
11. Securements.
12. Corner angles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation
and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.
6. Application of field- applied jackets.
7. Application at linkages of control devices.
8. Field application for each equipment type.
C. Field quality - control inspection reports.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION
AEC - 27815
WIV'rLIN
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire- test - response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and
jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors:
50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors
of 150 or less.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Flame- spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of
Flame- spread index of 75 or less, and smoke - developed index
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to
ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
Products:
a. Cell -U -Foam Corporation; Ultra -CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
E7
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -2
AEC - 27815
r I
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type 1.
3. Special- Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory- Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded - rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
C. RBX Corporation; Insul -Sheet 1800 and Insul -Tube 180.
C7
H. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory- applied vinyl jacket. Factory-
applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
C. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All- Service Duct Wrap.
i
High - Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory- applied jacket.
Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with
factory- applied ASJ. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory- applied ASJ.
Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
Products:
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
Products:
a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin -Glas.
b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations.
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
C. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin =Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
HVAC INSULATION
230700 -3
K. High- Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory- applied jacket.
Products:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin -Glas.
C. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations.
d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board.
e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW.
f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt.
Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
Products:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
C. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley -K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type 1, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory- applied ASJ. Factory- applied jacket
requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
3. Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory- applied ASJ. Factory- applied jacket
requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
M. Mineral- Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with
ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire inside surface of
preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation
under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor- retarder jacket with self - sealing
adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam,
exposing the absorbent cloth.
Products:
a. Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation.
b. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation.
N. Mineral- Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Semirigid board material with factory- applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA
Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or
more. Thermal conductivity (k value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in. /h x sq. ft. x deg F or less.
Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
Products:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.
b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
C. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
K
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -4
AEC - 27815
• - •
O. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply
Nth ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k- value) shall not exceed 0.26
Btu x in. /h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and
ASTM C 585.
1. Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.
b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.
2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral- Fiber, Hydraulic- Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1. Products:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik -Cote.
C. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.4 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular -Glass and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent -based resin adhesive, with a service temperature
range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -33.
C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
C. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
D. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S- 90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -5
AEC - 27815
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A
for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S- 90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1. Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
b. Johns - Manville; Zeston Perma -Weld, CEEL -TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
C. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
2.5 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates: Comply with MIL -C-
19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor - Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1
2.
3.
Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -10.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB- 05/15.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC -5.
Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625 -inch dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
Pi
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -6
AEC - 27815
•
L
4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
0 )
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular -Glass Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 4405.
e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -70.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30- 45/30 -46.
C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 4405.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
6. Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76 -8.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 4405.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water- resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water- resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
0 .
5. Color: White.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION
AEC - 27815
230700 -7
2.7 FACTORY - APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory- applied jackets on various applications. When factory-
applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft- paper, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with aluminum foil backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ -SSL: ASJ with self - sealing, pressure - sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type 1.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum foil, fiberglass - reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film
with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -
spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film
with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -
spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
7. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self- sealing, pressure - sensitive, acrylic -based
adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
a. Products:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
8. Vinyl Jacket: UL -rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to
ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
2.8 FIELD - APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field- applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum- foil - face, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing.
C. PVC Jacket: High - impact- resistant, UV- resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -
C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is
indicated in field - applied jacket schedules.
Products:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
C. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory- fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -8
AEC - 27815
0
5. Factory fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
` D. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H -14.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
C. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul -Mate.
2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field- applied jacket schedules.
4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1 -mil- thick, heat - bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3 -mil- thick, heat - bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
6. Factory- Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
b. Preformed 2 -piece or gore, 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows.
C. Tee covers.
d. Flange and union covers.
e. End caps.
f. Beveled collars.
g. Valve covers.
h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory fabricated fitting covers are not available.
E. Self- Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60 -mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane
for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous
resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum foil facing.
1. Products:
a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60.
F. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a
permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame - spread index of 5
and a smoke - developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film.
G. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a
permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame- spread index of 5
and a smoke - developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1. Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
H. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self - sealing, pressure - sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip.
220CT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -9
AEC - 27815
2.9 TAPES
E
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor- retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor- retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces forcelinch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf /inch in width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor- retarder tape matching field - applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 6 mils.
3. Adhesion: 64 ounces forcelinch in width.
4. Elongation: 500 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibf /inch in width.
D. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor- retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 5 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf /inch in width.
E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor- retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Film Thickness: 4 mils.
3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
4. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 55 Ibf/iinch in width.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H -14, 0.020 inch thick,
1/2 inch wide with wing seal.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -10
AEC - 27815
• •
B. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting
spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated
when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
1, Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
2. Spindle: Copper- or zinc - coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 - inch - diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to
bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers,
and substrates.
C. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position
indicated when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1 -1/2 inches in diameter.
2. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106- inch - diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to
2 -1/2 inches.
3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to
bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers,
and substrates.
D. Self -Sticking -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of
holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self - locking washer is
in place. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
2. Spindle: Copper- or zinc - coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch- diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
3. Adhesive - backed base with a peel -off protective cover.
E. Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self - locking washers formed from 0.016- inch - thick, galvanized -steel
sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2
inches in diameter.
1. Protect ends with capped self - locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure
permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
F. Nonmetal Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self- locking washers formed from 0.016- inch -thick nylon
sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2
inches in diameter.
G. Staples: Outward - clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4- inch -wide, stainless steel or Monel.
H. Wire: 0.062 -inch soft- annealed, stainless steel.
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354 -C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to
ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H -14.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -11
AEC - 27815
IM
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for
heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless -steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves,
and specialties.
B. Install insulation with tightly butted joints free of voids and gaps. Vapor barriers shall be continuous.
Before installing jacket material, install vapor - barrier system.
C. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry
state.
E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
G. Do not weld brackets, dips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
K. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in
insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor- barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs
from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal
ends at attachment to structure with vapor - barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material
manufacturer.
220CT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -12
AEC - 27815
0 •
v
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and
dry film thicknesses.
M. Install insulation with factory- applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch -wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4
inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self- sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
o�
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor- barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor- barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
O. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to
thermal movement.
P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt
joints.
Q. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration - control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
J
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint
sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof
flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -13
AEC - 27815
B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with
sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint
sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2
inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent
insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
Firestopping and fire- resistive joint sealers are specked in Division 7 Section "Through -
Penetration Firestop Systems."
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For
penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and
externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap
damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through -
Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for
100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor- discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -
discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches
O.C.
E]
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -14
AEC - 27815
0
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor
barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation
section with 1/2 -inch outward - clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of
factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams,
and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier
seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor - barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover
insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation
thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At
end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for
} each surface.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-
inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for
100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor- discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -
discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches
O.C.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor
barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation
220CT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -15
AEC - 27815
O
section with 1/2 -inch outward - clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of
factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams,
and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier
seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor- barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover
insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation
thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for
each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside
radius of elbows.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-
inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for
100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesively attached or self- sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of
tanks and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME - labeled pressure vessels.
b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature
and with substrate.
C. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor -pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and
vessels.
f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band material
compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where
insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation.
Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps,
turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment
approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential
girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center
openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest
circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or
tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie
wire or bands.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -16
AEC - 27815
0 •
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes,
and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply vapor - barrier mastic to open
ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. Create a facing lap for longitudinal
seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation
segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward - clinching staples, 1
inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -
barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. Repair punctures, tears, and
penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor - barrier seal.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over
entire surface of tanks and vessels.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints
with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-
inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8 -inch- diameter fasteners with wing nuts.
Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.
2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch thick.
3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal
between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.
_
3.6 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific
requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Secure single -layer insulation with bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming
insulation materials.
C. Install 24ayer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer
with 0.062 -inch wire spaced at 124nch intervals. Secure outer layer with bands at 12 -inch intervals.
D. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous
thermal and vapor- retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of insulating cement and coat with a mastic. Install
vapor- barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services.
Reinforce the mastic with fabric - reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well- shaped
contour.
F. For services not specified to receive a field- applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and
polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC
tape.
G. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and
color of pipe labels.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -17
AEC - 27815
H. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3
and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with
vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs
but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor- barrier mastic.
5. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor- barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of same insulation material and thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1
inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
5. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against
adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces
with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with
adjoining pipe insulation.
2. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
K. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material,
density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less
than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For
valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill
joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
4. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation
by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is
thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so AL
strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -18
AEC - 27815
0
n
U
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient
services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
5. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
L. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and
equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with
insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
M. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness
as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from
flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation
on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless -steel or aluminum
bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the
two -part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered
blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to
flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each
side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating
cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is
dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field- applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces
with a metal jacket.
j N. Special Installation Requirements for Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Insulation:
1. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
a. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
b. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice
the thickness of pipe insulation.
C. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness
as pipe insulation.
d. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.
3. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
a. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
b. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.
3.7 FIELD - APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -19
AEC - 27815
f�
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1 -1/2 -inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3- inch -wide joint strips at end
joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor- retarder jackets and exposed insulation with
vapor- retarder mastic.
B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 14nch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for
horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels.
Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c.
and at end joints.
D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to
pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2. Wrap factory- presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end
overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap
at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and
then apply 1 -1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive
or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to
manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to
maintain a permanent bond.
4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an
outer circumference of 33 -1/2 inches or less. The 33- 1 /2- inch - circumference limit allows for 2-
inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at
one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use
PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.
5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and
wrapping a minimum of 1 -1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
3.8 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket as
specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
Apply two finish coats of interior, flat, latex - emulsion size over a primer that is compatible with
jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation
manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of
the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum jackets.
220CT07 HVAC INSULATION
AEC - 27815
230700 -20
P1
• 0
0 1
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field- applied jacket and
insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to
one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
2. Inspect field - insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field- applied
jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall
be limited to one location for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation
Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine
compliance.
3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -
applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection
shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three
locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded
strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each
pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General' Article.
B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work.
C. Install new insulation and jackets to replace insulation and jackets removed for inspection. Repeat
inspection procedures after new materials are installed.
3.10 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and plenums.
2. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
7
B. Items Not Insulated:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
2. Factory- insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory- insulated plenums and casings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Vibration - control devices.
6. Factory- insulated access panels and doors.
3.11 INDOOR DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE
thickness to comply with energy code and
A. Concealed, Supply -Air Duct Insulation: Mineral -fiber blanket, 1 -1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft.
nominal density.
B. Concealed, Return -Air Duct Insulation: Mineral -fiber blanket, 1 -1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft.
nominal density.
C. Concealed, Outdoor -Air Duct Insulation Wrapped: Foil backed Mineral -fiber blanket, 1 -1/2 inches
thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
HVAC INSULATION
230700 -21
3.12 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a
type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Heating- Hot -Water Pump Insulation: Mineral -fiber board, 2 inches thick.
D. Heating- Hot -Water Expansion /Compression Tank Insulation: Mineral -fiber pipe and tank, 1 inch
thick.
E. Heating-Hot-Water Air- Separator Insulation: Mineral -fiber pipe and tank, 2 inches thick.
F. Domestic Hot -Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral -fiber pipe and tank, 4 inches thick.
G. Domestic Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral -fiber pipe and tank, 4 inches thick.
3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each
piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection
from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Fire - suppression piping.
2. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
3. Below -grade piping.
4. Chrome - plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Flexible elastomeric, 1/2 inch thick.
B. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: Flexible elastomeric, 1/2 inch thick.
C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for
People with Disabilities: Flexible elastomeric, 1/2 inch thick.
D. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Mineral -fiber pipe insulation, Type I, 1 -1/2
inches thick.
E. Heating- Hot -Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: Mineral- fiber, preformed pipe, Type I,
1 inch thick.
3.15 INDOOR, FIELD - APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory- applied jacket, install the field -
applied jacket over the factory- applied jacket.
22OCT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -22
AEC - 27815
0 0
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Ducts, Concealed:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 mils thick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
D. Ducts, Exposed:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 mils thick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
E. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 mils thick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
F. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72
Inches:
1. None.
2. Painted aluminum, smooth with 1- 1 /4- inch -deep corrugations thick.
G. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 mils thick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
H. Piping, Exposed:
1. None.
2. PVC, 20 milsthick.
3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 230700
;7
220CT07 HVAC INSULATION 230700 -23
AEC - 27815
LM
F
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
SECTION 230800
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC &R systems, assemblies, and
equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning
process requirements.
[A
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources,
and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
B. CxA: Commissioning Authority.
C. HVAC &R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.
D. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or
separately, they shall mean "as- built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Labor, instrumentation, tools, and equipment costs for technicians for the performance of
commissioning testing are covered by the "Schedule of Allowances" Article in Division 01 Section
"Allowances."
1.4 UNIT PRICES
A. Commissioning testing allowance may be adjusted up or down by the "List of Unit Prices" Article in
Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" when actual man -hours are computed at the end of commissioning
testing.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.
B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.
C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.
220CT07
AEC - 27815
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 -1
Q
D. Participate in HVAC &R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation
and inspection as directed by the CxA.
E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.
F. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition
equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.
1.6
CXA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Provide Project - specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for
actual HVAC &R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as
part of the construction contract.
B.
C.
D.
1.7
A.
1.8
Direct commissioning testing.
Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete.
Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.
COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan:
1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and
reports.
2. Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including design
changes that occurred during the construction phase.
3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and
startup checklists for HVAC &R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be
verified and tested.
4. Certificate of readiness, signed by the Contractor, certifying that HVAC &R systems,
assemblies, equipment, components, and associated controls are ready for testing.
5. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup procedures
have been completed.
6. Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC &R systems, subsystems, equipment, and
associated controls are ready for testing.
7. Test and inspection reports and certificates.
8. Corrective action documents.
9. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of readiness.
B. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.
IE
F1
22OCT07 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 230800 -2
AEC - 27815
• •
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING PREPARATION
A. Certify that HVAC &R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and
started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.
B. Certify that HVAC &R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that
they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been
recorded.
C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work
approved.
D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown,
normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm
conditions).
E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.
F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life- safety systems during each
mode of operation.
G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as
directed by the CxA.
3.2 TESTING AND BALANCING VERIFICATION
A. Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms,
checklists, and certificates to the CxA.
B. Notify the CxA at least 10 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for the
CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.
C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC &R systems
at the direction of the CxA.
1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing Contractor 10 days in advance of the date of field
verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified.
2. The testing and balancing Contractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial
number) that were used when original data were collected.
3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of
more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, adjusting, and
balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of
final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.
4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed.
\J
22OCT07 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 230800 -3
AEC - 27815
On
3.3
GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the
CxA.
B. Scope of HVAC &R testing shall include entire HVAC &R installation, from central equipment for heat
generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. Testing shall
include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.
C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency
conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.
D. The CxA along with the HVAC &R Contractor, testing and balancing Contractor, and HVAC &R
Instrumentation and Control Contractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and
checklists for HVAC &R systems, subsystems, and equipment.
E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.
F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test
under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide
equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document
simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating
conditions.
G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.
H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating
conditions and altering set points are not practical.
I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC &R system,
document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule
tests.
If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests
and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
3.4
HVAC &R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES
A. Boiler Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 23 boiler
Sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and boiler certification to the CxA.
B. HVAC &R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements
are specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC' and "Sequence of
Operations for HVAC Controls." Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.
C. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are specified
in Division 23 piping Sections. HVAC &R Contractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing,
and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to
the CxA. Plan shall include the following:
1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by
pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe
sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to
pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically
22OCT07 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 230800 -4
AEC - 27815
•
CJ
located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing,
and chemical treatment plan.
2. Description of equipment for flushing operations.
3. Minimum flushing water velocity.
4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,
flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.
D. Energy Supply System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test
performance of gas, hot -water systems and equipment at the direction of the CxA. The CxA shall
determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section
to be tested.
E. Refrigeration System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test
performance of chillers, cooling towers, refrigerant compressors and condensers, heat pumps, and
other refrigeration systems. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing
procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.
F. HVAC &R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to
test performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other
distribution systems, including HVAC &R terminal equipment and unitary equipment.
G. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test
performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls.
END OF SECTION 230800
D
A
220CT07 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 230800 -5
AEC - 27815
E
•
C �
J
1
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230900
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
71
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
B. See Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate to
this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each control device indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Schematic flow diagrams.
2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams.
3. Details of control panel faces.
4. Damper schedule.
5. Valve schedule.
C. Field quality- control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
22OCT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
AEC - 27815
F*1#1'111TIX
2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Alerton Inc.
2. Andover Controls Corporation.
3. Automated Logic Corporation.
4. Heat -Timer Corporation.
5. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control.
6. Invensys Building Systems.
7. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.
8. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company.
9. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
10. Staefa Control System Inc.; Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
11. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.
B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating
in multiuser, multitasking environment on token - passing network and programmed to control
mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color
graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point -and-
click graphics.
2.3 UNITARY CONTROLLERS
A. Unitized, capable of stand -alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system,
database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient 1/0 capacity for the application.
1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and
processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory
with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup.
2. Operating System: Manage 1/0 communication to allow distributed controllers to share real
and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling
with real -time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report
failures.
3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.
2.4 ANALOG CONTROLLERS
A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10 -stage type, with heavy -duty switching rated to handle loads and operated
by electric motor.
B. Electric, Outdoor -Reset Controllers: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod - and -tube type, proportioning action
with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg, and
single- or double -pole contacts.
C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone - bridge - amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for
remote - resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and
authority.
22OCT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 -2
AEC - 27815
0 •
1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control
readjustment potentiometer.
D. Fan -Speed Controllers: Solid -state model providing field- adjustable proportional control of motor
speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed.
Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum
speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.
2.5 TIME CLOCKS
A. Manufacturers:
1. ATC- Diversified Electronics.
2. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.
3. Precision Multiple Controls, Inc.
4. SSAC Inc.; ABB USA.
5. Time Mark Corporation.
B. Seven -day, programming - switch timer with synchronous- timing motor and seven -day dial;
continuously charged, nickel- cadmium - battery- driven, eight -hour, power - failure carryover; multiple -
switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and
two normally closed output contacts.
2.6
A.
B.
n
ELECTRONIC SENSORS
Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.
Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1. Manufacturers:
a.
BEC Controls Corporation.
b.
Ebtron, Inc.
C.
Heat -Timer Corporation.
d.
I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
e.
MAMAC Systems, Inc.
f.
RDF Corporation.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.
3. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable.
4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.
5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.
6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless -steel socket with minimum insertion length
of 2 -1/2 inches.
7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a. Set -Point Adjustment: Exposed.
b. Set -Point Indication: Exposed.
C. Thermometer: Exposed Red- reading glass.
d. Color: White.
e. Orientation: Vertical.
22OCT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
AEC - 27815
230900 -3
G U
8. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless -steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.
C. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:
Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. General Eastern Instruments.
C. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.
e. TCS /Basys Controls.
f. Vaisala.
2. Static - Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and
temperature compensated.
a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.
C. Building Static - Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25 -inch wg.
d. Duct Static - Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.
3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service;
minimum 150 -psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.
4. Water Differential- Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for
service; minimum 150 -psig operating pressure and tested to 300 -psig; linear output 4 to 20
mA.
5. Differential - Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot -duty rating and with
suitable scale range and differential.
6. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system; linear 1J
output 4 to 20 mA.
D. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
1. Set -Point Adjustment: Exposed.
2. Set -Point Indication: Exposed.
3. Thermometer: Exposed.
4. Color: White.
5. Orientation: Vertical.
E. Room sensor accessories include the following:
1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls.
2. Guards: Locking; heavy -duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base.
3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
2.7 STATUS SENSORS
A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential - pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable range of
0- to 5 -inch wg.
B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential- pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable
pressure - differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.
J
22OCT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 -4
AEC - 27815
C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current - sensing fixed- or split -core
l transformers with self- powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor
current.
D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600 -V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single -loop, self- powered
transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full -scale accuracy.
E. Power Monitor: 3 -phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current
transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent
error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.
F. Current Switches: Self- powered, solid -state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current
and system output requirements.
G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V
dc, feedback signal.
H. Water -Flow Switches: Bellows - actuated mercury or snap - acting type with pilot -duty rating, stainless -
steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1
enclosure.
Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
I. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual -level detectors using solid -state plug -in
sensors with a 3 -year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of 32 to 104 deg F; with 2
factory- calibrated alarm levels at 35 and 200 ppm.
2.8 THERMOSTATS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Erie Controls.
2. Danfoss Inc.; Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Div.
3. Heat -Timer Corporation.
4. Sauter Controls Corporation.
5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.
6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.
B. Electric, solid- state, room thermostat.
1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.
2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.
3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.
4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.
5. Short-cycle protection.
6. Programming based on weekday, Saturday, and Sunday.
7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24 -hour dock, keyboard
disable, remote sensor, and fan on -auto.
8. Battery replacement without program loss.
9. Thermostat display features include the following:
22OCT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 -5
AEC - 27815
X
a. Time of day.
b. Actual room temperature.
C. Programmed temperature.
d. Programmed time.
e. Duration of timed override.
f. Day of week.
g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."
C. Low4oltage, On -Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24 -V, bimetal- operated, mercury- switch type, with
adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set -point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set -point
range, and 2 deg F. maximum differential.
D. Remote -Bulb Thermostats: On -off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in
ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.
2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.
3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single - or multiple -unit elements, extended to
cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported.
4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of
instrument.
5. On -Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by
application.
6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is
removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.
E. Immersion Thermostat: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod- and -tube type, proportioning action with
adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.
F. Airstream Thermostats: Two -pipe, fully proportional, single- temperature type; with adjustable set
point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug -in test fitting or permanent pressure gage,
remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.
G. Heating/Cooling Valve -Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded -
rubber diaphragm, remote -bulb liquid - filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff
pressure of 25 psig, and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.
2.9 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or
two-position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
2. Permanent Split- Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and
sealed. Equip spring- return motors with integral spiral- spring mechanism in housings
designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or
feedback potentiometer.
3. Spring- Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2 -1/2: Size for running and breakaway
torque of 150 in. x Ibf.
4. Spring- Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway
torque of 150 in. x IV.
22OCT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 -6
AEC - 27815
0
B. Electronic Actuators: Direct - coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full - stroke cycles at rated
torque.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve dose off at maximum pump differential pressure.
3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Opposed -Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch- lb/sq. ft. of damper.
b. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm:
Increase running torque by 1.5.
4. Coupling: V -bolt and V- shaped, toothed cradle.
5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation- sensing circuitry.
6. Fail -Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring- return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear
release on nonspring- return actuators.
7. Power Requirements (Two - Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24 -V dc.
9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V do or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10 -V do position feedback signal.
10. Temperature Rating: [Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F.
12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.
2.10 CONTROL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div.
2. Erie Controls.
3. Neles- Jamesbury.
4. Sauter Controls Corporation.
B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum
pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition
disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.
NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug -type disc, flanged
ends, and renewable seat and disc.
Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless -steel or brass seats.
a. Single- Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top
and bottom.
b. Double- Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces
for plugs on top and bottom.
22OCT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 -7
AEC - 27815
4. Sizing: 5-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:
a. Two Position: Line size.
b. Two -Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop,
whichever is more.
C. Three -Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value
specified above.
5. Flow Characteristics: Two -way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three -way
valves shall have linear characteristics.
6. Close -Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide
minimum dose -off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two -way
valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system
(pump) head.
D. Butterfly Valves: 200 -psig, maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast -iron or ASTM A 536
ductile -iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless -steel stem, field- replaceable EPDM or
Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
1. Body Style: Wafer.
2. Disc Type: Nickel - plated ductile iron.
3. Sizing: 1 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable
plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.
1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.
2. Sizing: 3 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff
head.
3. Flow Characteristics: Two -way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three -way
valves shall have linear characteristics.
F. Self- Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated,
replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.
1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.
2. Thermostatic Operator: Wax - filled integral sensor with integral adjustable dial.
2.11 DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance Inc.
2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div.
3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).
4. United Enertech Corp.
5. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Dampers: AMCA- rated, opposed -blade design; 0.108- inch - minimum thick, galvanized -steel or
0.125 -inch- minimum thick, extruded - aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades
shall not be less than 0.064 -inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and
length of 48 inches.
22OCT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 -8
AEC - 27815
•
71
71
1. Secure blades to 1/2 -inch- diameter, zinc- plated axles using zinc - plated hardware, with nylon
blade bearings, blade - linkage hardware of zinc - plated steel and brass, ends sealed against
spring - stainless -steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 25 to plus 200 deg F.
3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed -cell neoprene.
4. Edge Seals, Low - Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber
blade seals and spring - loaded stainless -steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm
per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 -inch wg when damper is held by torque
of 50 in. x Ibf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.
2.12 CONTROL CABLE
A. Electronic and fiber -optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 27 Section
"Communications Horizontal Cabling."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify location of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details
before installation. Install devices to be ADA compliant.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
C. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section
" Hydronic Piping."
G. Install duct volume - control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.
H. Install electronic and fiber -optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal
Cabling."
3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
0
22OCT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 -9
AEC - 27815
B. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal
Cabling."
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are
exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several
cables follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number -code or color -code conductors for future identification and service of control system,
except local individual room control cables.
7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of
piping and equipment.
C. Connect manual -reset limit controls independent of manual - control switch positions. Automatic duct
heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
D. Connect hand -off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in
hand position.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test,
provide factory start-up and adjust field - assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with
compatible signal generator.
4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set
points are as required.
5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of
operation. Adjust PID actions.
6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
7. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 230900
220CT07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 -10
AEC - 27815
•
•
5
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230993
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B. See Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and devices
and for submittal requirements.
1.2 HEATING CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. The unit's first stage of heat shall be satisfied via the radiant floor heating system from a call from the
stand alone 2 stage wall mounted 7 day programmable thermostat. The second stage of heat or
quick recovery heat shall be accomplished via the unit's heat pump.
1.3 COOLING CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. The unit's air conditioning system shall be enabled via the stand alone 7 day heating cooling
thermostat. On a call for air conditioning the heat pump shall be energized.
1.4 SNOWMELT CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. The snowmelt system shall be controlled via a Tekmar 093 slab sensor / socket.
1.5 BOILER CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. The boilers shall be sequenced via Tekmar boiler control panel with a domestic recovery priority.
1.6 ELEVATOR SHAFT SMOKE RELIEF SEQUENCE
A. When smoke is detected by a smoke detector install at the top of the elevator shaft an alarm shallbe
annunciated at the fire alarm control panel and the shaft shall be naturally ventilated via positioning a
motor operated damper into a 100% open position.
1.7 PARKING GARAGE VENTILATION SEQUENCE
A. The parking garage shall be ventilated via exhaust fans interlocked with carbon monoxide detector.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
G - END OF SECTION 230993
220CT07 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 -1
AEC - 27815
j
E
•
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 231123
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fuel gas piping within the building. Products include the following:
1. Pipe, tube, fittings, and joining materials.
2. Protective pipe and fitting coating.
3. Piping specialties.
4. Specialty valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other work.
1. Include wiring diagrams.
C. Field quality- control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
It manufacturers specified.
220CT07 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -1
AEC - 27815
LM
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
B. Corrugated, Stainless -Steel Tubing Systems: Comply with AGA LC 1 and include the following:
1. Tubing: Corrugated stainless steel with plastic jacket or coating.
2. Fittings: Copper alloy with ends made to fit corrugated tubing. Include ends with threads
according to ASME 61.20.1 if connection to threaded pipe or fittings is required.
3. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M; Type E or S; Grade B; black. Wall thickness of wrought -steel pipe
shall comply with ASME B36.1 OM.
1. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME 816.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded
ends according to ASME 81.20.1.
2. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to
ASME 81.20.1.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass - to-iron seat, ground joint, and
threaded ends according to ASME 131.20.1.
4. Cast -Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME 816.1, Class 125.
5. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
2.3 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory- applied, corrosion- resistant polyethylene coating for use in
contact with materials that may corrode the pipe.
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.
B. Quick - Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector.
2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Valve End Connections: Threaded, according to ASME 81.20.1.
B. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and CSA International listed.
C. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball
type with chrome - plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless -steel disc and
fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2 -psig minimum pressure rating.
D. Gas Valves: ASME 816.33 and CSA International - listed bronze body and 125 -psig pressure rating.
22OCT07 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -2
AEC - 27815
0 0
0
E. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI 221.21, with electrical operator for actuation by appliance automatic
shutoff device.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ASCO General Controls.
b. ASCOLECTRIC, Ltd.
C. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson.
d. Dungs, Karl, Inc.
e. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
f. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
g. GPS Gas Protection Systems Inc.
h. Honeywell International Inc.
L Johnson Controls.
F. Electrically Operated Gas Valves: UL 429, bronze, aluminum, or cast -iron body solenoid valve; 120 -
V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous -duty molded coil. Include NEMA ISC 6, Type 4, coil enclosure and
electrically opened and dosed dual coils. Valve position shall normally be dosed.
1. Manufacturers:
ri
a. ASCO General Controls.
b. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson.
C. Dungs, Karl, Inc.
d. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
e. Goyen Valve Corp.; Tyco Environmental Systems.
f. Magnatrol Valve Corp.
g. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div.
h. Watts Industries, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping. Perform
leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control' Article to determine that all equipment is turned off
in affected piping section.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Use flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fuel Gas Piping, 2 psig or Less:
1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
3. NPS 1 -1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
v
C. Fuel Gas Piping 2 to 5 psig:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 -3
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop.
B. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve.
C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.
D. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements and piping joint construction are specified in Division 23
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Install pressure gage downstream from each service pressure regulator. Pressure gages are
specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
C. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit
constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside
and terminate with screened vent cap.
1. Above - Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to
approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums.
Do not locate valves above ceilings.
2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical
damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.
3. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in Part 2 "Protective
Coating" Article may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of authorities having
jurisdiction.
4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or
trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator
shafts.
D. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of
service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where
condensate would be subject to freezing.
Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use minimum length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same
size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of
plug or cap.
E. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings unless specifically
shown to be exposed to view.
F. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
G. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
H. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
I. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
22OCT07 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -4
AEC - 27815
0 i
rl
0 , )
J. Install corrugated, stainless -steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move.
K. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve.
L. Install pressure gage downstream from each line pressure regulator. Pressure gages are specified
in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
M. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2 -1/2 and larger connections.
N. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to
atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned -down, reducing -elbow fittings with corrosion- resistant
insect screens in large end.
KIR
A.
1
C.
M
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
Install hangers for horizontal corrugated, stainless -steel tubing with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. Option: Support tubing from structure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to appliances
using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each
appliance. Install union downstream from valve.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Test, inspect, and purge piping according to NFPA 54 and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory
results are obtained.
END OF SECTION 231123
n
220CT07
AEC - 27815
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 -5
G �
Ic
PI
• •
C7
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special -duty valves, and specialties
for the following:
1. Hot -water heating piping.
2. Radiant floor and snow melt piping.
3. Condensate -drain piping.
e�
C]
B. See Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Pressure -seal fittings
2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated -
orifice balancing valves and automatic flow - control valves.
3. Air control devices.
4. Chemical treatment.
5. Hydronic specialties.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports
for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the
building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Field quality - control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 232113
HYDRONIC PIPING
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME 831.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products,
and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 -1
rAm
Ln
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B. Annealed- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
L_
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as
indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness
or specific material is indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast- bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME 818.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper- phosphorus alloys for joining copper with
copper; or BAg -1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper -alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint,
plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
F
1E
P]
220CT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -2
AEC - 27815
• •
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Hart Industries International, Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.
3. Factory fabricated union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Couplings:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
3. Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and
300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 VALVES
A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23
Section "Valves."
B. Automatic Temperature - Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements
i specified in Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."
C. Bronze, Calibrated- Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
C. Flow Design Inc.
d. Gerand Engineering Co.
e. Griswold Controls.
f. Taco.
g. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company of America
4. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.
5. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
6. Plug: Resin.
7. Seat: PTFE.
8. End Connections: Threaded or socket.
9. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
10. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
11. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
12. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -3
AEC - 27815
0
D. Cast -Iron or Steel, Calibrated - Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
C. Flow Design Inc.
d. Gerand Engineering Co.
e. Griswold Controls.
f. Taco.
4. Body: Cast -iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.
5. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
6. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings.
7. Disc: Glass and carbon - filled PTFE.
8. Seat: PTFE.
9. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
10. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
11. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
12. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
13. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
E. Diaphragm -Operated, Pressure - Reducing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
4. Body: Bronze or brass.
5. Disc: Glass and carbon- filled PTFE.
6. Seat: Brass.
7. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings.
8. Diaphragm: EPT.
9. Low inlet - pressure check valve.
10. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
11. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
12. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with
operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
J
F]
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -4
AEC - 27815
• •
F. Diaphragm -Operated Safety Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
4. Body: Bronze or brass.
5. Disc: Glass and carbon - filled PTFE.
6. Seat: Brass.
7. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings.
8. Diaphragm: EPT.
9. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.
10. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
11. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
12. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Baler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating
pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
r G. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Flow Design Inc.
b. Griswold Controls.
4. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.
5. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable.
6. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass -alloy ball valve.
7. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.
8. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.
9. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure
fluctuations.
10. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.
11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F.
2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -5
AEC - 27815
Q
X
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Amtrol, Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
4. Taco.
C. Manual Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
D. ASME Expansion Tanks:
1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 150 -psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating
temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass.
Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. Air - Control Tank Fitting: Cast -iron body, copper - plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and
stainless -steel ball check, 100 -gal. unit only; sized for compression -tank diameter. Provide
tank fittings for 150 -psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature.
3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 150 -psig working pressure and 240
deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain
water, and close off system.
4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3 /4- inch - diameter gage glass, and
slotted -metal glass guard.
E. In -Line Air Separators:
1. Tank: One -piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to
maximize air separation.
2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.
3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.
2.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125 -psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity;
with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent
accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.
B. Ethylene and Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inhibitors and environmental -
stabilizer additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol solutions.
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -6
AEC - 27815
91
K
• 0
2.8 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Y- Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller, flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 and
larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
B. Stainless -Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire- reinforcing protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.
3. Performance: Capable of 3/4 -inch misalignment.
4. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
C. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
}
1. Type L, drawn - temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and soldered joints.
B. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought -steel fittings and wrought -cast or forged -steel flanges and
flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
C. Hot-Water Heating Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed - temper copper
tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints.
D. Condensate -Drain Piping: Type M, drawn - temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and
soldered joints.
E. A hybrid combination of copper / HePex system is an acceptable deduct alternate hydronic piping
system. All piping 1 -1/2" and larger shall be installed in type "L" copper. All piping ion areas where
rigidity is required shall be installed in copper, i.e., at shower heads.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Install shutoff -duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to
each piece of equipment.
B. Install calibrated- orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.
C. Install calibrated- orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -7
AEC - 27815
J
D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
E. Install safety valves at hot -water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip -pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the
outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.
F. Install pressure - reducing valves at makeup -water connection to regulate system fill pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of
valves.
L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 314 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with
cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the
bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "Valves."
Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment,
and elsewhere as indicated.
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -8
AEC - 27815
0
0
R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as
indicated.
S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure- reducing valve, solenoid valve, in -line
pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 34 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of
strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than
NPS 2.
T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in
Division 23 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."
U. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
C. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feetor longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported
on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
I 5. Provide copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
E. Install hangers for drawn - temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 318 inch.
5. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10 -foot intervals between floors.
v
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -9
AEC - 27815
L
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free
solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,
using copper - phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 61.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading
is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
H. Mechanically Formed, Copper - Tube -Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer - recommended tool and ,
procedure, and brazed joints.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat - transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for
system air venting.
B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent
upward slope toward tank.
C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger.
D. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top
of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line,
from main with full -size, full -port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4
pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full -size, full -port, ball
valve.
E. Install ASME expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge
tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.
1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.
2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank,
piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and
structural members.
220CT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -10
AEC - 27815
• •
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed,
only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to
Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and
detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum
of 24 hours, drain, dean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.
B. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of
operation.
C. Fill systems indicated to have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations:
Hot -Water Heating Piping: Minimum 30 percent propylene glycol.
} 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME 831.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush hydronic piping systems with dean water; then remove and dean or replace strainer
screens.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains
installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's
working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump,
valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom
of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times
"SE" value in Appendix A in ASME 831.9, "Building Services Piping."
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -11
AEC - 27815
0
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints,
and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. Perform the following before operating the system:
1. Open manual valves fully.
2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
3. Set makeup pressure - reducing valves for required system pressure.
4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely
(automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,
cooling towers, to specified values.
7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 232113
220CT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -12
AEC - 27815
C]
0
n
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Close - coupled, in -line centrifugal pumps and wet rotor circulators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 232123
HYDRONIC PUMPS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics,
furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated.
Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for
installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor - operated water pumps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
HYDRONIC PUMPS
•
232123 -1
AMIN
j
2.2 CLOSE - COUPLED, IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.
2. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group.
3. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries.
4. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.
5. Taco, Inc.
B. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, centrifugal, overhung - impeller, dose - coupled, in-line
pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts
mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 125 -psig minimum working pressure and a
continuous water temperature of 200 deg F.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings
at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion -flange connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and
secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance.
3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper -alloy shaft sleeve.
4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless -steel spring,
and bellows and gasket. Include water stinger on shaft between motor and seal.
5. Packing Seal: Stuffing box, with a minimum of four rings of graphite - impregnated braided yarn
with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.
6. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
D. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and
rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Motors."
2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175 -psig pressure rating, cast -iron body and end cap, pump -inlet
fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless -steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless -
steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory fabricated support.
B. Triple -Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175 -psig pressure rating, cast -iron body, pump -
discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze - fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.
Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight
of pumps is not supported by piping.
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 -2
AEC - 27815
• •
D. Install continuous- thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size to support pump
weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls." Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are
specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
E. Suspend vertically mounted, in -line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with
motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous- thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of
sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 23
Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Hanger and support materials are specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
3.2 ALIGNMENT
A.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
E
Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1 -1.5,
"Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation."
CONNECTIONS
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure -gage tapping, or install
single gage with multiple input selector valve.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
END OF SECTION 232123
220CT07 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 -3
AEC - 27815
j
E
IE
PC
n
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
SECTION 23300
REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air - conditioning applications.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R- 410 -A:
1. Suction Lines for Air- Conditioning Applications: 185 psig.
2. Suction Lines for Heat -Pump Applications: 325 psig.
3. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines: 325 psig.
73
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop based on manufacturer's test data.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and
fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil
traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show
interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design
actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes
to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between
compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and
compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
v
C. Field quality - control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
220CT07
AEC - 27815
REFRIGERANT PIPING
•
232300 -1
1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior
and exterior are dean when installed.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE LINE SETS AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L by the unit manufacturer..
B. Wrought- Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95 -5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper
socket fittings on copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin- bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned - bronze - wire - reinforced protective
jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4 -inch misalignment in minimum 7 -inch- long
assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight- through or
angle pattern.
2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless -steel spring.
3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.
4. Seat: Nylon.
5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
B. Packed -Angle Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.
3. Operator: Rising stem.
4. Seat: Nonrotating, self - aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.
5. Seal Cap: Forged -brass or valox hex cap.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
220CT07 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -2
AEC - 27815
o •
8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
C. Check Valves:
1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.
2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.
4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated -steel stem, and graphite seal.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.
8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
D. Service Valves:
1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2. Core: Removable ball -type check valve with stainless -steel spring.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Copper spring.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
i 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location
with 1/2 -inch conduit adapter, and [24] [115] [208] -V ac coil.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
8. Manual operator.
F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled
by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O -ring seal.
2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.
1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non - asbestos.
4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.
6. Reverse -flow option (for heat -pump applications).
7. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
8. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig.
a
22OCT07 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -3
AEC - 27815
H. Straight -Type Strainers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion - resistant coating.
2. Screen: 100 -mesh stainless steel.
3. End Connections: Socket or flare.
4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
Angle -Type Strainers:
1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
3. Screen: 100 -mesh monel.
4. End Connections: Socket or flare.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
Moisture /Liquid Indicators:
1. Body: Forged brass.
2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by
filter screen.
3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.
5. End Connections: Socket or flare.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
1E
K. Replaceable -Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.
1. Body and Cover: Painted -steel shell with ductile -iron cover, stainless -steel screws, and
neoprene gaskets.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless -steel support.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated [alumina] [charcoal].
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat -pump applications).
5. End Connections: Socket.
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential
measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
L. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion - resistant coating.
2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).
2.3 REFRIGERANTS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
E
220CT07 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -4
AEC - 27815
•
0
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.
2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Suction Lines NPS 1 -1/2 for Conventional Air - Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR,
annealed- temper tubing and wrought- copper fittings with brazed joints.
B. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat -Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR,
annealed- temper tubing and wrought- copper fittings with brazed joints.
C. Safety- Relief -Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, drawn- temper tubing and wrought -
copper fittings with soldered joints.
D. Safety - Relief -Valve Discharge Piping:
1. [NPS 1 -1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller] <Insert pipe size range >: Copper, Type ACR,
annealed- temper tubing and wrought- copper fittings with [brazed] [or] [soldered] joints.
J 2. [NPS 1 -1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller] <Insert pipe size range >: Copper, Type [ACR] [L (B)],
drawn- temper tubing and wrought - copper fittings with brazed joints.
3. [NPS 2 to NPS 3 (DN 50 to DN 80)] <Insert pipe size range >: Copper, Type K (A),
annealed- or drawn- temper tubing and wrought - copper fittings with [brazed] [or]
[soldered] joints.
4. [NPS 4 (DN 100)] <Insert pipe size >: Copper, Type [ACR] [K (A)] [L (B)], drawn- temper
tubing and wrought - copper fittings with soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. Install [diaphragm packless] [packed- angle] valves in suction and discharge lines of
compressor.
B. Install service valves for gage taps at strainers if they are not an integral part of strainers.
C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor
suction connection.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, install [diaphragm packless] [packed - angle] valves on inlet and
outlet side of filter dryers.
E. Install a full- sized, three -valve bypass around filter dryers.
F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve. Install solenoid valves in
horizontal lines with coil at top.
0 i
G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.
22OCT07 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -5
AEC - 27815
G O
1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
2. Secure bulb to dean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do
not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction -line
pressure at bulb location.
H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe
safety- relief -valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.
I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or
at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an
integral assembly for device being protected:
1. Solenoid valves.
2. Thermostatic expansion valves.
3. Compressor.
K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve[, and in
the suction line at the compressor].
L. Install flexible connectors at compressors.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
J. Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC and "Sequence of
Operations for HVAC Controls" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of
operation.
22OCT07 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -6
AEC - 27815
K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or
panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment
requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical
injury.
O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot -gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid -valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion -valve bulb.
Q. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
R. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
S. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
T. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full - thickness
insulation.
U. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"
for materials and methods.
V. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
B. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper - phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper
pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium -free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
11
22OCT07 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -7
AEC - 27815
G �
3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel Bevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper
pipe.
C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping and specialties. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and
safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.
3. Test high- and low- pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
C. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum
holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
22OCT07 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -8
AEC - 27815
•
•
4. Charge system with a new filter -dryer core in charging line.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B. Adjust high- and low- pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
C. Adjust set -point temperature of air - conditioning or chilled -water controllers to the system design
temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor -motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.
rl_
END OF SECTION 232300
22OCT07 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -9
AEC - 27815
A
F.
6 F
F.
u
E
ARCHITECTURALENGINEERINGCONSULTANTS SECTION 232500
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS HVAC WATER TREATMENT
n
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following boiler water- treatment systems:
1.2
1. Bypass chemical -feed equipment and controls.
2. Chemical treatment test equipment.
3. HVAC water - treatment chemicals.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Water quality for boiler systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth
for optimum efficiency of boiler equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or
the environment.
B. Base boiler water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, the boiler system
equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating
personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot -water heating, shall have the following water qualities:
1. pH: Maintain a value within 7 to 9.
2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.
3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.
4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.
5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.
6. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.
7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
9. Microbiological Limits:
a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mi.
b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mi.
C. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.
d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
1.3
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatment equipment showing tanks, maintenance
space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
220CT07
AEC - 27815
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500-1
C. Field quality - control test reports.
D. Other Informational Submittals:
1. Water - Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the
application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance
Requirements" Article above.
2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.
3. Passivation Confirmation Report: Verify passivation of galvanized -steel surfaces, and
confirm this observation in a letter to Architect.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. HVAC Water- Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water -
treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water- treatment
equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ampion Corp.
2. Anderson Chemical Co, Inc.
3. Aqua -Chem, Inc.; Cleaver - Brooks Div.
4. Barclay Chemical Co.; Water Management, Inc.
5. Boland Trane Services.
6. GE Betz.
7. GE Osmonics.
8. H -O -H Chemicals, Inc.
9. Metro Group. Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div.
10. ONDEO Nalco Company.
11. Watcon, Inc.
P]
P]
P]
22OCT07 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500-2
AEC - 27815
• •
2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL -FEED EQUIPMENT
A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion- resistant exterior coating, minimum 3 -1/2 -inch fill
opening in the top, and NPS 314 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill
cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system
pressure in the vessel.
1. Capacity: 5 gal.
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 150 psig.
2.3 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Kit: Manufacturer - recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall- mounting cabinet for
testing pH, TDS, inhibitor, chloride, alkalinity, and hardness; sulfite and testable polymer tests
for high - pressure boilers, and oxidizing biocide test for open cooling systems.
B. Corrosion Test - Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosive- resistant material, complete with
piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from
mild steel coupon in the test - coupon assembly.
Two-station rack for dosed -loop systems.
2.4 CHEMICALS
A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water- treatment system manufacturer that are
compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water
E quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
B. Water Softener Chemicals:
1. Mineral: High - capacity, sulfonated- polystyrene ion - exchange resin that is stable over
entire pH range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock. Resin
exchange capacity minimum 30,000 grains/cu. ft. of calcium carbonate of resin when
regenerated with 15 lb of salt.
2. Salt for Brine Tanks: High - purity sodium chloride, free of dirt and foreign material. Rock
and granulated forms are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require
servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor - mounting accessories to substrate.
0 B. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.
22OCT07 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500-3
AEC - 27815
a J
C. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors.
D. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits.
E. Bypass Feeders: Install in dosed hydronic systems, including hot -water heating, and equipped
with the following:
1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
2. Install water meter in makeup water supply.
3. Install test - coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder inlet.
5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Make piping connections between HVAC water - treatment equipment and dissimilar -metal piping
with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work
Results for HVAC."
D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water - treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general -duty
valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
E. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers
required in makeup water connections to potable -water systems.
F. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical
equipment.
G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
22OCT07 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500-4
AEC - 27815
•
C. Tests and Inspections:
1.
Inspect field - assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections.
2.
Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been
cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water- treatment system.
3.
Place HVAC water- treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the
preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.
4.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test
results are achieved.
5.
Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for
each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
6.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
7.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects.
8.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. At eight -week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on
hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical -feed systems are maintaining water quality
within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water
analysis advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article.
F. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards:
1. Silica: ASTM D 859.
2. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.
3. Iron: ASTM D 1068.
4. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water- treatment systems and equipment. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 232500
E
22OCT07 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500-5
AEC - 27815
c
F
6K
• 9
71
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal, rectangular ducts and fittings for supply, return, outside, and exhaust
air - distribution systems in low pressure classes.
B. See Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound - control devices, duct - mounting
access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
1. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions.
2. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
1�
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet
metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.
22OCT22
AEC - 27815
METAL DUCTS
233113 -1
t� 0
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock - forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60
coating designation; ducts shall have mill - phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized
sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. Vinyl coated fiberglass, "K" value of 0.29 at 75° F, 2 lb/cu. ft. density, secured to the metal with a
solid coat of adhesive, vinyl coated side to the air stream.
B. Insulation thickness: 1" unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass- fiber - reinforced fabric.
B. Tape Sealing System: Woven -fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified
acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.
C. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured,
UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
D. Solvent -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One -part, nonsag, solvent - release- curing, polymerized
butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One -part, acid- curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder- actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder - actuated concrete fasteners for standard - weight aggregate concretes or for slabs
more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder - actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight- aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all- thread rods or galvanized
rods with threads painted with zinc - chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal
and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self- tapping metal screws; compatible with
duct materials.
22OCT22 METAL DUCTS 233113 -2
AEC - 27815
Ej
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible" and complying with
requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and joint types
and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class
required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide -on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's
guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Nexus Inc.
C. Ward Industries, Inc.
El
C. Formed -On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal
and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Lockformer.
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2 -inch wg pressure class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and
0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
0
A. Static - Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 2 -inch wg.
2. Supply Ducts (in Mechanical Equipment Rooms): 2 -inch wg.
3. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1 -inch wg.
4. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1 -inch wg.
5. Laundry clothes dryer venting: .5- inch wg.
U
22OCT22
AEC - 27815
METAL DUCTS
233113 -3
3.2 DUCT LINER
A. Duct sizes shown on drawings for lined duct are dear opening inside lining. ,
B. Internally line the following duct:
1. All concealed supply air duct.
2. All transfer ducts. _
3. Other locations as shown on drawings.
3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and
Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings
with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each
coupling.
E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to
building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
F. Install ducts dose to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless
specifically indicated.
I. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke - control dampers, lighting layouts, and
similar finished work.
J. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to
cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical
equipment spaces and endosures.
L. Non - Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct
insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides
by at least 1 -1/2 inches.
M. Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers
are specified in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation
methods are specified in Division 7 Section 'Through- Penetration Firestop Systems."
N. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.
220CT22 METAL DUCTS 233113 -4
AEC - 27815
0
O. All laundry clothes dryer vent ductwork shall be constructed from aluminum sheet metal.
n
73
3.4 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and
Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2 -inch wg, seal transverse joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
C. Laundry clothes dryer vent shall be connected and sealed without the use of penetrating sheet metal
screws.
3.5 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one -fourth of failure
(proof -test) load.
D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
E. Install powder - actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1. Do not use powder - actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight - aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
0
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Duct
Accessories."
a. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
220CT22
AEC - 27815
END OF SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
233113 -5
0 0
Ic
Ic
K
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 233300
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2. Manual volume dampers.
3. Motor operated Control dampers.
4. Flange connectors.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Duct - mounted access doors.
7. Flexible connectors.
8. Flexible ducts.
9. Duct accessory hardware.
A71
fil6� 3IT,II��1> &?
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments
to other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include
dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct
systems and other construction. Include the following:
E,
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
C. Control damper installations.
d. Fire - damper and smoke - damper installations, including sleeves; and duct - mounted
access doors.
e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, 'Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 9013, 'Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
E
B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
22OCT22
AEC - 27815
DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -1
O Cj
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet
metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Exposed - Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a finish for
concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts.
D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed
ducts and standard, 1 -side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
10. Ruskin Company.
11. SEMCO Incorporated.
12. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Description: Gravity balanced.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
D. Maximum System Pressure: 1 -inch wg.
E. Frame: 0.052- inch - thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
22OCT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -2
AEC - 27815
• •
F. Blades: Multiple single -piece blades, center- pivoted, maximum 6 -inch width, 0.025 -inch- thick, roll-
22OCT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -3
AEC - 27815
formed aluminum with sealed edges.
G.
Blade Action: Parallel.
H.
Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.
I.
Blade Axles:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.
J.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
K.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L.
Bearings: Steel ball.
M.
Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2. Counterweights and spring- assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Front of rear screens.
6. 90- degree stops.
N.
Sleeve: Minimum 20 -gage thickness.
2.3
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
C. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d. McGill AirFlow LLC.
e. METALAIRE, Inc.
f. Nailor Industries Inc.
g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
I. Trox USA Inc.
j. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
a. Hat - shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 -inch minimum thickness.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
C. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
22OCT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -3
AEC - 27815
H
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design.
C. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized - steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings:
a. Stainless -steel sleeve.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length
of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
C. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d. McGill AirFlow LLC.
e. METALAIRE, Inc.
f. Nailor Industries Inc.
g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
L Trox USA Inc.
j. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames: Hat - shaped, 0.10 -inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for
attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design.
C. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Roll- Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10- inch -thick aluminum sheet.
e. Extruded - Aluminum Blades: 0.050 -inch -thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings:
a. Stainless -steel sleeve.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length
of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
22OCT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -4
AEC - 27815
E3
C. Jackshaft:
1. Size: 1 -inch diameter.
2. Material: Galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe - bearing assembly mounted on supports at
each mullion and at each end of multiple- damper assemblies.
3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple -
damper assembly.
D. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc - plated, die -cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32- inch -thick zinc- plated steel, and a
3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
6. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
7. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
8. M &I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M &1 Heat Transfer Products Ltd.
9. McGill AirFlow LLC.
10. METALAIRE, Inc.
11. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc.
12. Nailor Industries Inc.
13. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
14. Ruskin Company.
15. Vent Products Company, Inc.
16. Young Regulator Company.
B. Frames:
1. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.
2. Mitered and welded corners.
C. Blades:
1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
2. Opposed -blade design.
3. Galvanized steel.
4. 0.064 inch thick.
5. Blade Edging: Closed -cell neoprene edging.
6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
D. Blade Axles: 1/2- inch - diameter; galvanized steel; blade- linkage hardware of zinc- plated steel and
brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
is 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
22OCT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -5
AEC - 27815
D
E. Bearings:
1. Stainless -steel sleeve.
2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of
damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Description: Add -on or roll - formed, factory- fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.6 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. METALAIRE, Inc.
4. SEMCO Incorporated.
5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars
perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil- shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces
and fibrous -glass fill.
C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin - bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane
runners suitable for duct mounting.
D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNNs "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible "; Figures 2 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E. Vane Construction: Single wall.
F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.
P1
22OCT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -6
AEC - 27815
• •
I I
2.7 DUCT - MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
5. McGill AirFlow LLC.
6. Nailor Industries Inc.
7. Ventfabrics, Inc.
8. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Duct - Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible'; Figures 2 -10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-
11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure
Gass.
C. Vision panel.
d. Hinges and Latches: 1 -by -1 -inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
n_1
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
C. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches
with outside and inside handles.
A
M
A.
1. Door:
Pressure Relief Access Door:
1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2. Door: Single wall with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class.
3. Operation: Open outward for positive - pressure ducts and inward for negative - pressure ducts.
4. Factory set at 10 -inch wg.
5. Doors close when pressures are within set -point range.
6. Hinge: Continuous piano.
7. Latches: Cam.
8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.
9. Insulation Fill: 1- inch - thick, fibrous -glass or polystyrene foam board.
DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Flame Gard, Inc.
3. 3M.
22OCT22
AEC - 27815
DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -7
G �
B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528 -inch carbon steel.
D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease- tight, high - temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum
2000 deg F.
F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg, positive or negative.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Materials: Flame- retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3 -1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips
of 2 -3/4- inch -wide, 0.028 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 - inch -thick aluminum sheets.
Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. /sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf /inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic
rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz. /sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 530 Ibf /inch in the warp and 440 Ibfrnch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression,
and with a load stop. Include rod and angle -iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30
degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement at start and
stop.
22OCT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -8
AEC - 27815
• i
2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. McGill AirFlow LLC.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring -
steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor - barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5 -inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
C. Flexible Duct Connectors:
1. Clamps: Stainless -steel band with cadmium- plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -
gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
2. Non -Clamp Connectors: Adhesive.
2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct -
insulation thickness.
# B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and
grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in
galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust
fan unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat
channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
22OCT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -9
AEC - 27815
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
3. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief
access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from
dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
4. At each change in direction and at maximum 50 -foot spacing.
5. Upstream of turning vanes.
6. Elsewhere as indicated.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J. Access Door Sizes:
1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
K. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment'
to indicate the purpose of access door.
L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M. For fans developing static pressures of 5 -inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded
vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12 -inch lengths of flexible duct. Do
not use flexible ducts to change directions.
O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low- pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60 -inch
lengths of flexible duct damped or strapped in place.
P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive.
Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust
limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement during start and stop of
fans.
22OCT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -10
AEC - 27815
• 0
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.
3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat -
response device is installed.
END OF SECTION 233300
M-1
I]
220CT22 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -11
AEC - 27815
O U
F .
IE
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 233423
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ceiling- mounting ventilators.
2. In -line centrifugal fans.
3. Wall mounted fans.
E3
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
C. Field quality - control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
C. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
220CT07
AEC - 27815
POWER VENTILATORS
233423 -1
G
1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
2. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.
3. Carnes Company HVAC.
4. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.; a division of W. W. Grainger, Inc.
5. Greenheck.
6. Loren Cook Company.
7. NuTone Inc.
8. Penn Ventilation.
D. Description: Direct- or belt -driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.
E. Housing: Heavy -gage, removable, spun - aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet cone.
F. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward - inclined blades.
G. Belt- Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self- aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast -iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
H. Accessories:
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal- overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2 -inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
3. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel - blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve;
factory set to dose when fan stops.
5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel -blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator;
wired to dose when fan stops.
2.2 CEILING - MOUNTING VENTILATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. American Coolair Corp.
2. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.
3. Carnes Company HVAC.
4. Loren Cook Company.
5. NuTone Inc.
6. Penn Ventilation.
D. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in -line
applications.
22OCT07 POWER VENTILATORS 233423 -2
AEC - 27815
P]
PE
1E
E. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
F. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel
shall be removable for service.
G. Grille: Aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
H. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor
plug -in.
I. Accessories:
1. Manual Starter Switch: Single -pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light.
2. Time -Delay Switch: Assembly with single -pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate.
3. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer.
4. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire -rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless -steel springs,
and fusible link.
5. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille.
6. Isolation: Rubber -in -shear vibration isolators.
7. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.
2.3 IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
S B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
2. Carnes Company HVAC.
3. Greenheck.
4. Loren Cook Company.
5. Penn Ventilation.
D. Description: In -line, direct- driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes,
fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets, and
accessories.
E. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and
support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
F. Direct -Driven Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on
outside of fan housing.
G. Belt -Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around
belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.
H. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
a
22OCT07 POWER VENTILATORS 233423 -3
AEC - 27815
0 0
I. Accessories:
1. Volume - Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1 -inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard for
inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.
4. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy - coated steel.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Motors."
B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismic -
control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete
base.
C. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers having a
static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration - control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Vibration and Seismic Controls."
E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification.
G. Duct installation and connection requirements are specked in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with
flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories."
H. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
I. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
J. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. ,
220CT07 POWER VENTILATORS 233423 -4
AEC - 27815
• 0
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts
and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal - overload protection is
installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel
free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust
belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. Disable automatic temperature - control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated
rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature - control operators.
11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
END OF SECTION 233423
7
220CT07 POWER VENTILATORS 233423 -5
AEC - 27815
w
PI
0 0
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 233713
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall- mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance
data including throw and drop, static - pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity,
model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
j 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. Fixed Face Grille:
1. Manufacturers:
a. A -J Manufacturing Co., Inc.
b. Anemostat; a Mestek Company.
C. Carnes.
d. Dayus Register & Grille.
e. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div.
f. Krueger.
g. Titus.
h. Tuttle & Bailey.
22OCT07 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS 233713 -1
AEC - 27815
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Frame: 1 -1/4 inches wide.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method
of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling - Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air
volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where
indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the
center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect
for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before
starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
P]
F]
220CT07 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS 233713 -2
AEC - 27815
0
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 23510
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS
0
ry
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Listed stainless steel single -wall AL429 -C vents chimneys.
B. See Division 23 Section "Draft Control Devices" for induced -draft and mechanical fans and for
motorized and barometric dampers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Special gas vents.
2. Building- heating - appliance chimneys.
B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 235100
220CT07 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
AEC - 27815
235100 -1
0 0
P11
•
n
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
1.2
A.
B.
•
SECTION 235216
CONDENSING BOILERS
This Section includes packaged, factory fabricated and - assembled, gas - fired, water -tube
condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified
professional engineer.
a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
and rails and equipment mounting frames.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that boiler, accessories, and
components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Source quality - control test reports.
E. Field quality - control test reports.
F. Operation and maintenance data.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code.
22OCT07 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -1
AEC - 27815
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil
Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N,
"Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."
E. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial- Industrial Gas Heating
Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Warranty Period for Pulse- Combustion Boilers:
a. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Shock: 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
b. Heat - Exchanger Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Fire -Tube Condensing Boilers:
a. Leakage and Materials: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years
from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Water -Tube Condensing Boilers: 20 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Water - Jacketed Condensing Boilers:
a. Leakage and Materials: Eight years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Buderus.
2. AERCO International.
3. Laars Heating Systems; a division of Waterpik Technologies, Inc.
4. Lochinvar Corporation.
IE
22OCT07 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -2
AEC - 27815
n�_
�3
0
2.2 TRIM
A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.1, "Power Piping or ANSI B31.9, "Building Services
Piping"
B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit.
C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.
D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2 -inch- diameter, combination water- pressure and -
temperature gage. Gages shall have operating- pressure and - temperature ranges so normal
operating range is about 50 percent of full range.
E. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic.
F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose -end gate valve.
G. Circulation Pump: Non - overloading, in -line pump with split- capacitor motor having thermal - overload
protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures and
temperatures.
2.3 CONTROLS
A.
A
Refer to Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:
1. Control transformer.
2. Set -Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable.
3. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory fabricated and field- installed panel to control burner
firing rate to maintain space temperature in response to thermostat with heat anticipator
located in heated space.
4. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory- fabricated and field- installed panel to control burner
firing rate to reset supply -water temperature inversely with outside -air temperature. At 0 deg F
outside -air temperature, set supply -water temperature at 140 deg F; at [60 deg F outside -air
temperature, set supply -water temperature at 140 deg F.
a. Include automatic, alternating firing sequence for multiple boilers to ensure maximum
system efficiency throughout the load range and to provide equal runtime for boilers.
C11*
Cs]
Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner
operation.
1. High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler
design temperature.
2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water.
Cutoff switch shall be automatic -reset type.
3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual -reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler
combustion -air inlet.
4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for
above conditions.
220CT07 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -3
AEC - 27815
►_J
2.4 ELECTRICAL POWER
rMON
A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 26 Sections.
B. Single -Point Field Power Connection: Factory- installed and -wired switches, motor controllers,
transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single -point field power
connection to boiler.
1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
2. Wiring shall be numbered and color -coded to match wiring diagram.
3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway.
4. Field power interface shall be to fused disconnect switch.
5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or circuit
breaker.
6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.
2.5 VENTING KITS
A. Kit: Complete system, ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal, thimble, indoor
plate, vent adapter, condensate trap and dilution tank, and sealant.
B. Combustion -Air Intake: Complete system, stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet air
coupling, and sealant.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide,
oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency;
perform hydrostatic test.
B. Test and inspect factory- assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 BOILER INSTALLATION
A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section "Common
Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 03.
B. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric isolation pads with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch.
Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Install gas -fired boilers according to NFPA 54.
D. Assemble and install boiler trim.
E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specked to be factory mounted.
22OCT07 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -4
AEC - 27815
0
C]
3.2 CONNECTIONS
F. Install control wiring to field - mounted electrical devices.
0
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size
of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.
D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of materials
suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specked in Division 23 Section
"Common Work Results for HVAC."
E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas -train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train
connection. Provide a reducer if required.
F. Connect hot -water piping to supply- and return - boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange
at each connection.
G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.
H. Boiler Venting:
1. Install flue venting kit and combustion -air intake.
2. Connect full size to boiler connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section
"Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks."
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
J. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air -
fuel ratio and combustion.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low -limit safety set points of
fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.
22OCT07 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -5
AEC - 27815
►_J
b. Set field- adjustable switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two
visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 235216
W
F]
220CT07 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -6
AEC - 27815
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 235700
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plate and frame heat exchangers for snow melt applications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Tube - removal space.
2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BRAZED PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Alfa Laval Thermal, Inc.
2. Invensys APV, Inc.
3. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett.
4. Mueller, Paul Company.
5. Polaris Plate Heat Exchangers.
6. Tranter PHE, Inc.
7. Triangle Tube, Inc.
B.
Configuration: Brazed assembly consisting of two end plates, one with threaded nozzles and
pattern - embossed plates.
C.
End -Plate Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
D.
Threaded Nozzles: Type 316 stainless steel.
E.
Plate Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
22OCT07 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 -1
AEC - 27815
F. Brazing Material: Copper or nickel.
G. Capacity and Characteristics:
1. General:
a. Heat - Exchanger Surface Area, sq. ft.: See schedule and /or cut sheets for individual
specifications.
b. Heat Exchanged, Btu/h: See schedule and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
C. Operating Weight, lb: See schedule and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
2. Hot Side:
a. Fluid: Water & 30% Propylene Glycol.
b. Working Pressure, psig: 30 max.
C. Supply Pressure, psig: 30 max.
d. Flow Rate, gpm: See schedule and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
e. Pressure Drop, psig: See schedule and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
f. Inlet Temperature, Deg F: 180.
g. Outlet Temperature, Deg F: 160.
h. Fouling Factor: See schedule and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
i. Inlet Size, NPS: See schedule, plan, and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
j. Outlet Size, NPS: See schedule, plan, and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
3. Cold Side:
a. Fluid: Water & 50% Propylene Glycol.
b. Working Pressure, psig: 30 max.
C. Supply Pressure, psig: 30 max.
d. Flow Rate, gpm: See schedule and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
e. Pressure Drop, psig: See schedule and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
f. Inlet Temperature, Deg F: 130.
g. Outlet Temperature, Deg F: 105.
h. Fouling Factor: See schedule and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
i. Inlet Size, NPS: See schedule, plan, and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
j. Outlet Size, NPS: See schedule, plan, and /or cut sheets for individual specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HEAT- EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Install heat exchangers on 4" "house- keeping pad."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install shutoff valves at heat - exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
B. Install relief valves on heat - exchanger heated -fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full size
of valve connection, to floor drain.
C. Install vacuum breaker at heat - exchanger steam inlet connection.
D. Install hose end valve to drain shell.
END OF SECTION 235700
220CT07 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 -2
AEC - 27815
• 0
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 232123
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, air - cooled condensers for outdoor installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Wiring diagrams.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 -2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-
2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air- Conditioning."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Daikin
2. Mitsubishi
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, condenser coils, condenser
fans and motors, and unit controls.
220CT07 AIR - COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313-1
AEC - 27815
D J
B. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper -tube, aluminum finned coil; factory tested at 425 psig.
Circuit to match compressors.
C. Condenser Fans and Drives: Propeller fans for vertical or horizontal air discharge; directly
driven with permanently lubricated ball- bearing motors with integral current- and thermal -
overload protection.
D. Operating and Safety Controls: Indude condenser fan motor thermal and overload cutouts;
115 -V control transformer, if required; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors and a
nonfused factory- mounted and -wired disconnect switch for single external electrical power
connection.
E. Unit Casings: Galvanized or zinc - coated steel treated and finished with manufacturer's
standard paint coating, designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components
and controls, and with removable panels for access to controls, condenser fans, motors, and
drives; fan guards, lifting eyes, and removable legs.
2.3
I►_3
A
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Verification of Performance: Rate air - cooled condensers according to ARI 460.
Testing Requirements: Factory test sound -power -level ratings according to ARI 270.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
B. Install air - cooled condensers on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23
Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 03.
C. Install roof - mounting units on equipment supports specified in Division 07.
D. Vibration Isolation: Mount air - cooled condensers on rubber pads with a minimum deflection of
1/4 inch. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 23
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods.
F. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
G. Refrigerant Piping: Connect piping to unit with pressure relief, service valve, filter -dryer, and
moisture indicator on each refrigerant- circuit liquid line. Refrigerant piping and specialties are
specified in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
22OCT07 AIR - COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313-2
AEC - 27815
0 0
13
1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.
2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
5. Verify proper airflow over coils.
B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to
structure.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning air - cooled condensers and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 236313
o�
7
22OCT07 AIR - COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
AEC - 27815
236313-3
F
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
n
SECTION 238113
HEAT PUMPS
A. Section includes packaged terminal heat pumps and their accessories and controls, in the
following configurations:
1. Heat -pump units.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For packaged terminal air conditioners. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality- control reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 -2004, Section 4 - "Outdoor
Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation Rate Procedures,"
and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 -2004.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of packaged terminal air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Manufacturer's standard, but not less
than five years from date of Substantial Completion, including components and labor.
220CT07 HEAT PUMPS 238113 -1
AEC - 27815
2. Warranty Period for Nonsealed System Parts: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
five years from date of Substantial Completion, including only components and excluding
labor.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Daikin.
2. Mitsubishi
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, self- contained, packaged terminal heat pump with
room cabinet, electric refrigeration system, heating, and temperature controls; fully charged with
refrigerant and filled with oil; with hardwired chassis.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound -Power Level Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 300, "Sound Rating and Sound
Transmission Loss of Packaged Terminal Equipment."
B. Unit Performance Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 310/380/CSA C744, "Packaged
Terminal Air - Conditioners and Heat Pumps."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and
tolerances.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps.
2. After installing packaged terminal air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
22OCT07 HEAT PUMPS 238113 -2
AEC - 27815
0 0
114
13
7
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
B. Packaged terminal air conditioners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 238113
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
HEAT PUMPS
238113 -3
E3 O
E
9 0
11-
r_31
A
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 238239
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes propeller unit heaters with hot -water heating coils.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of propeller unit heater indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams.
2. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.
C. Field quality- control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Sterling.
2. Engineered Air Ltd.
3. McQuay International.
4. Rosemex Products.
5. Trane.
220CT07
AEC - 27815
UNIT HEATERS
238239 -1
2.2 UNIT HEATERS
A. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical and horizontal discharge
configuration with adjustable discharge louvers.
B. Comply with UL 2021.
2.3 CASING
A. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls.
B. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory- assembled and - tested
propeller unit heater before shipping.
C. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical units.
2.4 COILS
A. Test and rate hot -water propeller unit - heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.
B. Hot -Water Coil: Copper tube, minimum 0.025 -inch wall thickness, with mechanically bonded
aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig
and a maximum entering -water temperature of 325 deg F, with manual air vent. Test for leaks to
350 psig underwater.
2.5 FAN
A. Propeller type, aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi.
2.6 FAN MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Motors."
B. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated.
2.7 CONTROLS
A. Control Devices: Unit - mounted thermostat, 2 -way zone valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
B. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all- thread hanger rods and spring hangers.
Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Vibration hangers are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic
Controls."
22OCT07 UNIT HEATERS 238239 -2
AEC - 27815
C. Install unit mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match
lighting controls.
D. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply -water connection and union
and calibrated balancing valve on return -water connection of unit heater.
F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality - control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and
unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical
connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
13
C•l
END OF SECTION 238239
220CT07 UNIT HEATERS
AEC - 27815
238239 -3
I
• •
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 238316
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS RADIANT FLOOR AND SNOW MELT PIPING
f7T3ARECI 14MI
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes radiant floor and snow melt piping, including pipes, manifolds, fittings, and
piping specialties.
B. See Division 15 Section " Hydronic Piping" for pipes and connections to hydronic systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Snow melt piping specialties, including rated capacities and water flow and pressure
drops of selected models.
B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves, manifolds, controls,
and support assemblies and their attachments to the building structure.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of snow melt piping with the slabs.
B. Coordinate size and location of landscape boxes to allow access to manifolds concealed in the
landscaping.
C. Coordinate thickening of slabs where required for adequate encasement of radiant heating piping
components.
D. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure
integrity of piping and as approved by Architect.
E. Coordinate the rigid board insulation and expansion joint requirements.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Distribution Manifolds:
220CT07 RADIANT FLOOR AND SNOW MELT PIPING 238316 -1
AEC - 27815
a.
Wirsbo Co.
b.
Rehau Inc.
2. Controls:
a.
Tekmar Control Systems, Ltd.
b.
Infloor Heating Systems.
C.
Wirsbo Co.
3. Snowmelt Sensors:
a.
Tekmar Control Systems Ltd..
b.
Rehau Inc.
C.
Wirsbo Co.
2.2 HEAT- TRANSFER PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. PE Plastic: ASTM D 2239, SIDR -11.5 for service at 30 psig and 140 deg F.
1. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, copper with stainless -steel damps.
B. PEX Plastic: ASTM F 876.
1. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, copper or brass compression type.
C. Single -Tube Plastic tubing: Braided -fiber- reinforced, EPDM elastomeric with extra carbon steel with
high- temperature, oxygen - barrier cover; for service at 100 psigand 210 deg F.
1. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, copper with stainless -steel crimps or damps.
2.3 SNOWMELT SPECIALTIES
A. Distribution Manifolds: Brass modular design with injection pumping, main shutoff and balancing
valves with thermometers, zone shutoff and balancing valves with flow meter, and identification
plate.
1. Mixing Valves: 125 psig, 230 deg F maximum operating pressure and temperature, brass or
cast- bronze body, EPDM seals, and threaded connections.
2. Identification Plate: Valve plate shall identify room served and loop number.
3. If more than one loop serves a room, provide identification plates on manifolds to identify
rooms served.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. Thermostats: 32 to 160 deg F, standard 24 V, 3 wire.
B. Snow Detector: 24 -V, microprocessor- based, pulse- width - modulation type, automatically detects
snow and maintains set temperature in a snow - melting slab.
C. Snow - Melting Control Sequence: Flow- through snow - melting piping is modulated to satisfy snow
detector.
22OCT07 RADIANT FLOOR AND SNOW MELT PIPING 238316 -2
AEC - 27815
END OF SECTION 238316
a
220CT07 RADIANT FLOOR AND SNOW MELT PIPING 238316 -3
AEC - 27815
PART 3 - EXECUTION
}
3.1
HEAT - TRANSFER PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install piping downstream from manifolds without joints.
B.
Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to concrete reinforcement using plastic be straps.
1. Install a sleeve of foam -type insulation around tubing and extending for a minimum of 3
echelons each side of the slab penetration to protect the tubing passing through expansion
joints.
C.
Install manifolds in accessible locations.
D.
Fill snow melt system with 50% of propylene glycol-to-water solution.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test Preparation:
1. Temporarily restrain expansion joints so they are not damaged due to test pressure. If
temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
2. Flush with dean water, and dean strainers.
3. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure.
1 B.
Tests:
l
1. Subject piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure
but not more than 100 psig.
2. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied, examine piping, joints, and connections for
leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat
hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
C.
Prepare a written report of testing.
END OF SECTION 238316
a
220CT07 RADIANT FLOOR AND SNOW MELT PIPING 238316 -3
AEC - 27815
u
w
• •
i ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230513
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS COMMON MOTOR WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single -phase and polyphase, general- purpose, horizontal,
small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and
installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for
field installation.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC
equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 70 deg f and at altitude of 8,150 feet above sea
level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
220CT07 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -1
AEC - 27815
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random - wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F.
Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame
sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced - Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited
to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated
with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture - resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse -width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium - Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter -Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
5. All Three phase motors shall be provided with phase loss protection.
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of
specific motor application:
1. Permanent -split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable- torque, permanent - split- capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.
Thermal- protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
1E
22OCT07 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -2
AEC - 27815
0
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 230513
D
7
220CT07 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 -3
AEC - 27815
IE
0
•
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230516
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal - bellows expansion joints.
2. Expansion compensators.
3. Packed slip expansion joints.
4. Pipe bends and loops.
5. Alignment guides and anchors.
rill
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Delegated- Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for
selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly and attachment to building structure.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end
connections, and location for each expansion joint.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Product certificates.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
22OCT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 -1
AEC - 27815
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal - Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular- corrugated - bellows type with external tie
rods.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product name,
designation, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Flex -Hose Co., Inc.
C. Flexicraft Industries.
d. Flex - Pression, Ltd.
e. Flex -Weld, Inc.
f. Metraflex, Inc.
g. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
h. Proco Products, Inc.
3. Metal - Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single or Multiple -ply phosphor- bronze
bellows, copper pipe end connections, and brass shrouds.
4. Metal - Bellows Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single, or multiple -ply stainless -steel
bellows, steel pipe end connections, and carbon -steel shroud.
5. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Configuration: Single, or double bellows type with base, unless otherwise indicated.
7. End Connections: Flanged or welded.
B. Expansion Compensators: Double -ply corrugated steel, stainless - steel, or copper -alloy bellows in a
housing with internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end dip for positioning.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product name or
designation or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Flexicraft Industries.
C. Flex - Pression, Ltd.
d. Flex -Weld, Inc.
e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
f. Metraflex, Inc.
g. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division.
h. Unaflex Inc.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Configuration for Copper Piping: Two -ply phosphor- bronze or stainless -steel bellows and
bronze or stainless -steel shroud.
5. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two -ply stainless -steel bellows and carbon -steel shroud.
6. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint.
7. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
8. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded.
1E
22OCT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 -2
AEC - 27815
0
C. Packed Slip Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1007, carbon- steel, packing type designed for repacking
under pressure and pressure rated for 250 psig at 400 deg F minimum. Include asbestos -free PTFE
packing, compound limit stops, and drip connection if used for steam piping.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
C. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
3. Configuration: Single- and double -joint class with base, unless otherwise indicated.
4. End Connections: Flanged or weld ends to match piping system.
2.2 ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two- section outer cylinder and base for alignment
of piping and two- section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b.
Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
C.
Flex -Hose Co., Inc.
d.
Flexicraft Industries.
e.
Flex -Weld, Inc.
f.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g.
Metraflex, Inc.
h.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
i.
Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division.
2.3 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS
A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME 818.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert - wedge -type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc - coated carbon steel.
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc - coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc - coated steel.
4D E. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Comply with requirements in Division 03
Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
22OCT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 -3
AEC - 27815
t� 0
F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and - packaged, dry, hydraulic- cement, nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION -JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non -
Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."
B. Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed.
C. Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end - loading and torsional stress.
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold- sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb
tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME 831.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, 'Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 SWING CONNECTIONS
A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main.
3.4 ALIGNMENT -GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.5 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME 831.9 and
to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of poured -in -place concrete of dimensions indicated and include
embedded fasteners.
220CT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 -4
AEC - 27815
0
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion joint manufacturer's written instructions if expansion
joints or compensators are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in
concrete.
END OF SECTION 230516
rl ,
LA
220CT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 -5
AEC - 27815
0
F
• •
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230519
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Flowmeters.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL -CASE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.
Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
B.
Case: Die -cast aluminum, brass or Chrome - plated brass 7 inches or 9 inches] long.
C.
Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic - liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
D.
Tube Background: Satin -faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
E.
Window: Glass or plastic.
F.
Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device, rigid, straight or angle type, type].
G.
Stem: Copper - plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
H.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -1
AEC - 27815
G O
2.2 DUCT -TYPE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product
by one of the following:
1. Miljoco Corp.
2. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Case: Die -cast aluminum, metal or plastic, 7 inches long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin - faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
E. Window: Glass or plastic.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device, rigid or angle type.
G. Stem: Metal, for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installation.
H. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermometer stem.
I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.3 BIMETALLIC - ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
2. Ernst Gage Co.
3. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.
4. Tel -Tru Manufacturing Company.
5. Trerice, H. O. Co.
6. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Description: Direct - mounting, bimetallic - actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.3.
C. Case: Dry or Liquid - filled type, stainless steel with 3 -inch to 5 -inch diameter.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Dial: Satin- faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
F. Pointer: Red or other dark -color metal.
G. Window: Glass or plastic.
H. Ring: Stainless steel.
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -2
AEC - 27815
• e
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Amtrol, Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
4. Taco.
C. Manual Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
D. ASME Expansion Tanks:
1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 150 -psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating
temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass.
Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. Air - Control Tank Fitting: Cast -iron body, copper- plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and
stainless -steel ball check, 100 -gal. unit only; sized for compression -tank diameter. Provide
tank fittings for 150 -psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature.
3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 150 -psig working pressure and 240
deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain
water, and close off system.
4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4 -inch- diameter gage glass, and
slotted -metal glass guard.
E. In -Line Air Separators:
1. Tank: One -piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to
maximize air separation.
2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.
3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.
2.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125 -psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity;
with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent
accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.
B. Ethylene and Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inhibitors and environmental -
stabilizer additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol solutions.
0
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -6
AEC - 27815
F. Diaphragm -Operated Safety Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering ,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
4. Body: Bronze or brass.
5. Disc: Glass and carbon- filled PTFE.
6. Seat: Brass.
7. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings.
8. Diaphragm: EPT.
9. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.
10. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
11. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
12. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating
pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
G. Automatic Flow - Control Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Flow Design Inc.
b. Griswold Controls.
4. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.
5. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable.
6. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass -alloy ball valve.
7. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.
8. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.
9. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure
fluctuations.
10. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.
11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F.
2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
220CT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -5
AEC - 27815
v
•
C�
D. Cast -Iron or Steel, Calibrated- Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
C. Flow Design Inc.
d. Gerand Engineering Co.
e. Griswold Controls.
f. Taco.
4. Body: Cast -iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.
5. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
6. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings.
7. Disc: Glass and carbon- filled PTFE.
8. Seat: PTFE.
9. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
10. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
11. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
12. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
13. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
�111
E. Diaphragm - Operated, Pressure - Reducing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
C. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
4. Body: Bronze or brass.
5. Disc: Glass and carbon - filled PTFE.
6. Seat: Brass.
7. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings.
8. Diaphragm: EPT.
9. Low inlet - pressure check valve.
10. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
11. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
12. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with
operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
I]
220CT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -4
AEC - 27815
0
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Hart Industries International, Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.
3. Factory fabricated union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Couplings:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
3. Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and
300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 VALVES
A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23
Section "Valves."
B. Automatic Temperature - Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements
specified in Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."
C. Bronze, Calibrated -Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
C. Flow Design Inc.
d. Gerand Engineering Co.
e. Griswold Controls.
f. Taco.
g. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company of America
4. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.
5. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
6. Plug: Resin.
7. Seat: PTFE.
8. End Connections: Threaded or socket.
9. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
10. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
11. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
12. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -3
AEC - 27815
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
0 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B. Annealed- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as
indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME 816.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness
or specific material is indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast- bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges.
40 B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME 818.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper- phosphorus alloys for joining copper with
copper; or BAg -1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper -alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint,
plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -2
AEC - 27815
C
1E
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
SECTION 232113
HYDRONIC PIPING
A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special -duty valves, and specialties
for the following:
1. Hot -water heating piping.
2. Radiant floor and snow melt piping.
3. Condensate -drain piping.
B. See Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Pressure -seal fittings
2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated -
orifice balancing valves and automatic flow - control valves.
3. Air control devices.
4. Chemical treatment.
5. Hydronic specialties.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports
for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the
building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Field quality - control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME 831.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products,
and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
F]
22OCT07 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -1
AEC - 27815
•
LJ
G O
J. Install corrugated, stainless -steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move.
K. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve.
L. Install pressure gage downstream from each line pressure regulator. Pressure gages are specified
in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
M. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2 -1/2 and larger connections.
N. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to
atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned -down, reducing -elbow fittings with corrosion- resistant
insect screens in large end.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 318 inch.
C. Install hangers for horizontal corrugated, stainless -steel tubing with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. Option: Support tubing from structure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to appliances
using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each
appliance. Install union downstream from valve.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Test, inspect, and purge piping according to NFPA 54 and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory
results are obtained.
END OF SECTION 231123
F I
E
F7
220CT07 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -5
AEC - 27815